OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MODEL 703E
PHOTOMETRIC O3 CALIBRATOR
© TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS
ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION
(TAPI)
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: [email protected]
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
05743 Rev. C
DCN 5521
29 July 2009
Copyright 2007
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED.
We recommend that this document be read in its entirety before any attempt is
made to operate the instrument.
DOCUMENTS
Document P/N
05743
Revision
DCN
5359
5359
5359
5359
5359
5359
5359
5359
Nomenclature
M703, Manual, Instruction - Title
M703, Manual, Instruction - Text
M703, Appendix A, Menu Tree
M703, Appendix B, Spare Parts
M703, Appendix C, Repair Form
M703, Appendix D, Schematics
List, Spare Parts, M703
Dated
B
B
C
B
B
B
F
B
03/20/09
03/20/09
03/20/09
03/20/09
03/20/09
03/20/09
03/20/09
03/20/09
05744
05745
05746
05747
05748
05834
05863
List, Recommended Spares Stocking Levels,
M703
05834
05863
J
5480
5480
List, Spare Parts, M703
07/15/09
07/15/09
D
List, Recommended Spares Stocking Levels,
M703
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Safety Messages
SAFETY MESSAGES
Your safety and the safety of others are very important. We have provided many important safety messages in
this manual. Please read these messages carefully.
A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety message is
associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual and inside the M703E
Photometric O3 Calibrator. The definition of these symbols is described below:
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD: Refer to the instructions for details on the specific
hazard.
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning.
CAUTION: Electrical Shock Hazard.
TECHNICIAN SYMBOL: All operations marked with this symbol are to be
performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.
CAUTION
The M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described
in this manual. If you use the M703E in a manner other than that for which it was intended,
unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences.
NOTE
Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the
M703E or any other Teledyne Instruments product
can be obtained by:
Contacting Teledyne Instruments’ Customer Service Department at 800-324-5190
or
Via the internet at http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms
05744 Rev B
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Safety Messages
M703E Dynamic Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
ii
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................................................................................... 1
1. INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................. 3
1.1. M703E calibrator Overview............................................................................................................................3
1.2. Using This Manual .........................................................................................................................................3
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND WARRANTY......................................................... 5
2.1. Specifications.................................................................................................................................................5
2.2. CE Mark Compliance.....................................................................................................................................6
2.3. Warranty.........................................................................................................................................................7
3. GETTING STARTED............................................................................................................ 9
3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup ...........................................................................................................................9
3.1.1. Model 703E calibrator............................................................................................................................10
3.2. Electrical Connections .................................................................................................................................13
3.2.2. Analog output TEST CHANNEL Connections.......................................................................................13
3.2.6. Connecting the Serial Ports...................................................................................................................18
3.3. Pnenumatic Connections.............................................................................................................................19
3.3.1. Dry Air In................................................................................................................................................19
3.3.4. Exhaust..................................................................................................................................................20
3.4. Initial Operation............................................................................................................................................21
3.4.1. START-UP.............................................................................................................................................21
3.4.5. Operating Modes for the O3 Generator..................................................................................................25
4.1. FAQ’s ...........................................................................................................................................................27
4.2. Glossary.......................................................................................................................................................27
5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE..................................................................... 29
5.1. Carrying Strap Handle (OPT 29)..................................................................................................................29
5.2. Communication Options...............................................................................................................................30
5.2.3. RS-232 Multidrop (OPT 62)...................................................................................................................30
5.3. Additional Manual (OPT 70).........................................................................................................................32
5.4. Extended Warranty (OPT 92) ......................................................................................................................32
5.5. NIST Traceable, Primary Standard CERTIFICATION.................................................................................32
6. OPERATING THE M703E CALIBRATOR ......................................................................... 35
6.1. Test Functions..............................................................................................................................................36
05744 Rev B
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Table of Contents
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.2. Overview of Operating modes .....................................................................................................................37
6.3. STANDBY Mode ..........................................................................................................................................38
6.4. General Information about the GENERATE mode ......................................................................................39
6.4.1. GENERATE AUTO: Basic Generation of Calibration Gas................................................................39
6.5. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES...............................................................................................40
6.5.1. SETUP SEQ: Programming Calibration Sequences.........................................................................40
6.5.1.2. Naming a Sequence.......................................................................................................................42
6.5.1.6. Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence...................................................................................48
6.5.2.1. The Generate Step.........................................................................................................................51
6.5.2.2. The STANDBY Step.......................................................................................................................52
6.5.2.5. The CC OUTPUT Step...................................................................................................................54
6.6. SETUP CFG............................................................................................................................................57
6.7. SETUP CLK.............................................................................................................................................58
6.8. SETUP PASS..........................................................................................................................................60
6.9. SETUP DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT: Using the TEST Channel Analog Output...............................62
6.9.1.4. Turning the TEST CHANNEL Over-Range Feature ON/OFF........................................................67
6.9.2.1. Enabling or disabling the TEST CHANNEL Auto-Cal Feature.......................................................69
6.9.2.3. Manual Calibration of the TEST CHANNEL configured for Voltage Ranges.................................72
6.10. SETUP MORE VARS: Internal Variables (VARS)............................................................................75
6.11. Operating the M703E Calibrator as an O3 Photometer.............................................................................77
6.11.1. Set up for Operating the M703E as an O3 Photometer .......................................................................77
6.12. SETUP LVL: Setting up and using LEADS (Dasibi) Operating Levels .................................................79
6.12.5.3. Editing or Deleting a LEVEL.........................................................................................................84
7.1. Using the Analyser’s Communication Ports.................................................................................................87
7.1.3. COMM Port Baud Rate..........................................................................................................................90
7.1.4. COMM Port Communication Modes......................................................................................................91
7.1.5. COMM Port Testing...............................................................................................................................93
iv
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table of Contents
7.1.7.2. Command Syntax...........................................................................................................................96
7.2. Remote Access by Modem..........................................................................................................................99
7.3. Multidrop RS-232 Set Up.......................................................................................................................... 101
7.4. RS-485 Configuration of COM2................................................................................................................ 103
7.5. Remote Access via the Ethernet............................................................................................................... 105
7.5.1. Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate........................................................... 105
7.5.2.1. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses........................................................................ 108
7.6. APICOM Remote Control Program........................................................................................................... 111
8. M703E CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION.................................................................. 113
8.1. Verifying and Calibrating the M703E’s O3 Photometer............................................................................. 113
8.1.1. Setup for VERIFYING AND calibrating the O3 Photometer................................................................ 113
8.1.2. Verifying O3 Photometer Performance ............................................................................................... 115
8.1.3. Calibrating the O3 Photometer............................................................................................................ 116
8.1.4. O3 Photometer Dark Calibration ......................................................................................................... 118
8.2. Calibrating the O3 Generator .................................................................................................................... 119
8.2.2. Viewing O3 Generator Calibration Points............................................................................................ 120
8.2.3. Adding or Editing O3 Generator Calibration Points............................................................................. 121
8.2.4. Deleting O3 Generator Calibration Points........................................................................................... 122
8.2.5. Turning O3 Generator Calibration Points ON / OFF ........................................................................... 123
8.2.6. Performing an Automatic Calibration of the O3 Generator ................................................................. 124
8.3. M703E Gas Pressure Sensor Calibration................................................................................................. 125
8.4. M703E Gas Flow Calibration .................................................................................................................... 128
9. THEORY OF OPERATION............................................................................................... 135
9.1. Pneumatic Operation ................................................................................................................................ 135
9.1.1.1. Flow Control Assemblies............................................................................................................. 135
9.2. Electronic Operation ................................................................................................................................. 137
9.2.1. Overview............................................................................................................................................. 137
9.2.3.1. Valve Control............................................................................................................................... 141
05744 Rev B
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Table of Contents
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.2.4.6. I2C Data Bus................................................................................................................................ 144
9.2.4.7. Power-up Circuit.......................................................................................................................... 144
9.3. Front Panel Interface ................................................................................................................................ 147
9.3.1.1. Calibrator Status LEDs................................................................................................................ 148
9.3.1.3. Display......................................................................................................................................... 148
9.4. Software Operation................................................................................................................................... 150
9.5. O3 generator operation............................................................................................................................. 151
9.5.1. Principle of Photolytic O3 Generation ................................................................................................. 151
9.5.3. O3 Generator Electronic Operation ..................................................................................................... 152
9.5.3.1. O3 Generator Temperature Control............................................................................................. 154
9.6. Photometer Operation............................................................................................................................... 155
9.6.1. Measurement Method......................................................................................................................... 155
9.6.1.1. Calculating O3 Concentration...................................................................................................... 155
9.6.4.1. O3 Photometer Temperature Control .......................................................................................... 160
9.6.4.2. Pneumatic Sensors for the O3 Photometer ................................................................................. 161
10. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES .......................................................... 163
10.1. Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................................................... 163
10.2. Performing Leak Checks ........................................................................................................................ 167
10.3. Cleaning or replacing the Absorption Tube............................................................................................ 171
10.4. Rebuilding the Dry Air Pump .................................................................................................................. 171
10.5. Photometer UV Source Lamp Adjustment.............................................................................................. 172
10.6. Photometer UV Source Lamp Replacement .......................................................................................... 173
10.7. Adjustment or Replacement of Ozone Generator UV Lamp .................................................................. 174
11.1. General Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................ 177
11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function......................................................................................... 182
11.2. Using the Analog Output Test Channel.................................................................................................. 183
11.3. Using the Internal Electronic Status LEDs.............................................................................................. 184
11.3.2.1. I2C Bus Watchdog Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 184
11.3.2.2. O3 Status LEDs ......................................................................................................................... 185
11.4. Subsystem Checkout.............................................................................................................................. 186
11.4.2. AC Main Power................................................................................................................................. 186
vi
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table of Contents
11.4.4. I2C Bus.............................................................................................................................................. 188
11.4.8.1. A/D Functions............................................................................................................................ 191
11.4.8.2. Test Channel / Analog Outputs Voltage.................................................................................... 191
11.4.11. Temperature Problems................................................................................................................... 196
11.4.11.1. Box / Chassis Temperature..................................................................................................... 196
11.4.11.2. Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature........................................................................... 196
11.4.11.3. UV Lamp Temperature............................................................................................................ 196
11.4.11.4. Ozone Generator Temperature............................................................................................... 197
11.5. Troubleshooting the O3 photometer........................................................................................................ 197
11.5.1. Dynamic Problems with the O3 photometer...................................................................................... 197
11.5.1.1. Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero .................................................................................... 197
11.5.1.2. Noisy, Unstable, or Non-Linear Span O3 Readings .................................................................. 198
11.5.2. Checking Measure / REFERENCE VALVE...................................................................................... 199
11.6. Troubleshooting the O3 Generator.......................................................................................................... 200
11.7. Trouble Shooting the Optional O3 generator .......................................................................................... 201
11.8. Repair Procedures.................................................................................................................................. 202
11.9. Technical Assistance.............................................................................................................................. 203
12. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE......................................................... 205
12.1. How Static Charges are Created............................................................................................................ 205
12.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage ......................................................................................... 206
12.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage..................................................................................................... 207
12.4. Basic Principles of Static Control............................................................................................................ 207
12.4.1. General Rules................................................................................................................................... 207
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack................................................................................................ 209
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service......................................... 210
05744 Rev B
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Table of Contents
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1: M703E Front Panel Layout................................................................................................................10
Figure 3-2: M703E Rear Panel Layout.................................................................................................................10
Figure 3-3: M703E Internal Layout – Top View ...................................................................................................11
Figure 3-4: M703E Pneumatic Diagram...............................................................................................................12
Figure 3-5: M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector ...........................................................................................13
Figure 3-6: Status Output Connector ...................................................................................................................14
Figure 3-7: M703E Digital Control Input Connectors ...........................................................................................16
Figure 3-8: M703E Digital Control Output Connector ..........................................................................................17
Figure 3-9: Basic Pneumatic Setup of M703E.....................................................................................................19
Figure 3-10: Location of Pressure Regulator Adjustment Knob.............................................................................26
Figure 5-1: M703E with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets.........................................................29
Figure 5-1: M703E Multidrop Card.......................................................................................................................30
Figure 5-2: M703E Ethernet Card........................................................................................................................31
Figure 5-3: M703E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed........................................................................................31
Figure 6-1: Front Panel Display ...........................................................................................................................37
Figure 6-2: M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector ...........................................................................................62
Figure 6-3: Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL .......................................................................................72
Figure 6-4: Set up for Using the M703E to Measure an External O3 Source ......................................................77
Figure 6-5: LEADS Level Display Format ............................................................................................................85
Figure 7-1: Default Pin Assignments for Back Panel COMM Port connectors (RS-232 DCE & DTE) ................88
Figure 7-2: Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector (RS-232)....................................................88
Figure 7-3: Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62)................................................................... 101
Figure 7-4: RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Calibrator Interconnect Diagram........................................................ 102
Figure 7-5: CPU card Locations of RS-232/485 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers...................................... 103
Figure 7-6: Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.......................................................... 104
Figure 7-7: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode..................................................................... 104
Figure 7-8: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface ................................................................................. 111
Figure 8-1: Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Using Internal O3 Generator.................................... 114
Figure 8-2: Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Using an External O3 Generator.............................. 114
Figure 8-3: Pressure Calibration Monitor Points............................................................................................... 125
Figure 8-4: O3 Generator Pressure Monitor Point Physical Location– M703E................................................. 126
Figure 8-5: Output Flow Calibration Monitor Point............................................................................................ 130
Figure 9-1: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies...................................................................................... 135
Figure 9-2: M703E Electronic Block Diagram................................................................................................... 137
Figure 9-3: M703E CPU Board Annotated........................................................................................................ 138
Figure 9-4: Relay Board PCA with AC Relay Retainer Removed..................................................................... 140
Figure 9-5: Heater Control Loop Block Diagram............................................................................................... 141
Figure 9-6: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA ............................................................................................... 141
Figure 9-7: M703E Power Distribution Block diagram ...................................................................................... 145
Figure 9-10: M703E Front Panel Layout............................................................................................................. 147
Figure 9-11: Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram............................................................................. 149
Figure 9-12: Schematic of Basic Software Operation......................................................................................... 150
Figure 9-13: O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics.................................................................................................. 151
Figure 9-14: O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations ............................................................................. 152
Figure 9-15: O3 Generator Electronic Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 153
Figure 9-16: O3 Generator Electronic Components Location ............................................................................. 153
Figure 9-17: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations................................................. 154
Figure 9-18: O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle.................................................................................... 157
Figure 9-19: O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Reference Cycle................................................................................. 157
Figure 9-20: O3 Photometer Absorption Path ..................................................................................................... 158
Figure 9-21: O3 Photometer Layout – Top Cover Removed............................................................................... 159
Figure 9-22: O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram....................................................................................... 160
Figure 10-2: Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks................................................................ 170
Figure 10-3: Photometer – Location of UV Detector Gain Adjustment & UV Lamp Set Screw ........................... 173
viii
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table of Contents
Figure 10-4: O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations................................................. 174
Figure 10-5: Location of O3 Generator Reference Detector Adjustment Pot...................................................... 174
Figure 11-1: Example of Signal I/O Function ...................................................................................................... 182
Figure 11-2: CPU Status Indicator ...................................................................................................................... 184
Figure 11-3: Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting....................................................................... 185
Figure 11-4: Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA.......................................................................... 187
Figure 11-5: Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly.............................................................................. 202
Figure 12-1: Triboelectric Charging..................................................................................................................... 205
Figure 12-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station.......................................................................................................... 207
LIST OF TABLES
M703E Electrical and Physical Specifications.....................................................................................5
M703E Specifications for Ozone Generator........................................................................................6
M703E Specifications for O3 Photometer ............................................................................................6
Status Output Pin Assignments.........................................................................................................14
M703E Control Input Pin Assignments..............................................................................................15
M703E Control Input Pin Assignments..............................................................................................17
Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up...........................................................................................23
Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up Attributes.......................................................................40
Test Channels Functions Available on the M703E’s Analog Output.................................................64
Table 6-10: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration..................................................................72
Table 6-11: Variable Names (VARS)....................................................................................................................75
COMM Port Communication Modes..................................................................................................91
Terminal Mode Software Commands................................................................................................95
Relay Board Status LEDs............................................................................................................... 142
AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7)......................................................................... 146
M703E Photometer Measurement / Reference Cycle.................................................................... 156
Table 10-1: M703E Maintenance Schedule....................................................................................................... 165
Table 11-1: Front Panel Warning Messages ..................................................................................................... 179
Table 11-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures ................................................................................................ 180
Table 11-3: Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools .................................................................................... 183
Table 11-4: Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications............................................................................... 184
Table 11-5: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications..................................................................................... 185
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes............................................................................... 187
Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels............................................................................................. 188
Table 11-8: Relay PCA Control Devices............................................................................................................ 189
Table 11-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs .................................................. 192
Table 11-10: Status Outputs Check..................................................................................................................... 192
Table 11-11: M703E Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions ......................... 193
05744 Rev B
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Table of Contents
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table 11-12: Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions Check...................... 194
Table 12-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities............................................................................ 205
Table 12-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD..................................................................... 206
x
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table of Contents
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX A-1: Model 703E Software Menu Trees, Revision C.0
APPENDIX A-2: Model 703E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O, Revision C.0
APPENDIX A-3: Model 703E Warnings and Test Measurements via Serial I/O, Revision C.0
APPENDIX A-4: Model 703E Signal I/O Definitions, Revision C.0
APPENDIX A-5: Model 703E Terminal Command Designators, Revision C.0
APPENDIX B - Model 703E SPARE PARTS LIST
APPENDIX C - Model 703E REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE
APPENDIX D - Model 703E ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS
USER NOTES:
05744 Rev B
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Table of Contents
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
xii
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
GENERAL INFORMATION
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES
2
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Introduction
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. M703E CALIBRATOR OVERVIEW
The Model 703E is a microprocessor-based ozone calibrator for calibration of ambient ozone analyzers, such as
the T-API M400E. The M703E features an internal ozone photometer that provides very accurate closed loop
feedback control of the ozone concentration.
As many as 50 independent calibration sequences may be programmed into the M703E, covering time periods
of up to one year. The setup of sequences is simple and intuitive. These sequences may be actuated manually,
automatically, or by a remote signal. The sequences may be uploaded remotely, including remote editing. All
programs are maintained in non-volatile memory.
The M703E design emphasizes fast response, repeatability, overall accuracy and ease of operation. It may be
combined with the Model 701 Zero Air Generator to provide the ultimate in easy to use, precise calibration for
your ozone analyzers.
Some of the exceptional features of your M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator are:
Advanced E Series electronics
Lightweight for transportability
Optional Ethernet connectivity
12 independent timers for sequences
Nested sequences (up to 5 levels)
Internal ozone generator and photometer allows use as primary or transfer standard
1.2. USING THIS MANUAL
NOTE
Throughout this manual, words printed in capital, bold letters, such as SETUP or ENTR represent
messages as they appear on the calibrator’s display.
This manual is organized in the following manner:
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented. This is a good overview of the
topics covered in the manual. There is also a list of appendices, figures and tables. In the electronic version of
the manual, clicking on any of these table entries automatically views that section.
SECTION I – GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
A brief description of the M703E calibrator architecture as well as a description of the layout of the
manual and what information is located in its various sections and chapters.
SPECIFICATIONS AND WARRANTY
Teledyne Instruments’ warranty statement.
05744 Rev B
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Introduction
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
GETTING STARTED
Instructions for setting up, installing and running your calibrator for the first time.
GLOSSARY:
Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the calibrator and a glossary of
acronyms and technical terms.
OPTIONAL HARDWARE & SOFTWARE
A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your calibrator.
SECTION II – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
USING THE M703E CALIBRATOR
Step-by-Step instructions for using the display/keyboard to set up and operate the M703E calibrator.
REMOTE OPERATION OF THE M703E CALIBRATOR
Information and instructions for interacting with the M703E calibrator via its several remote interface
options (e.g. via RS-232, Ethernet, its built in digital control inputs/outputs, etc.)
M703E VALIDATION AND VERIFICATION
Methods and procedures for validating and verifying the correct operation of your M703E Photometric O3
Calibrator
SECTION III – TECHNICAL INFORMATION
THEORY OF OPERATION
An in-depth look at the various principals by which your calibrator operates as well as a description of
how the various electronic, mechanical and pneumatic components of the calibrator work and interact
with each other. A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the calibrator’s
operation.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES
Description of preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on you
calibrator to assure good operating condition.
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR OF THE M703E CALIBRATOR
This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the calibrator in general as
well as instructions on performing repairs.
A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE
This section describes how static electricity occurs; why it is a significant concern and; how to avoid it
and avoid allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your calibrator.
APPENDICES
For easier access and better updating, some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a
series of appendices at the end of this manual. These include version-specific software menu trees, warning
messages, serial I/O variables as well as spare part listings, repair questionnaires, interconnect drawing,
detailed pneumatic and electronic schematics.
USER NOTES:
4
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND
WARRANTY
2.1. SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-1: M703E Analytical Specifications
Linearity
+/- 1.0% of full scale
Precision
1.0 ppb
Stability
+/- 2.0 ppb (photometer feedback mode)
180 seconds to 95%
Response Time
Stability (7-days)
1% photometer feedback; 3% without photometer feedback (CNST or REF)
Table 2-2: M703E Electrical and Physical Specifications
Temperature Range
Humidity Range
5-40ºC
0 - 95% RH, non-condensing
7” (178 mm) x 17” (432 mm) x 24” (609 mm)
10,000 ft Maximum
Dimensions (HxWxD)
Operating Altitude
35.5 lbs (16.1 kg) including internal zero air pump
Weight
115VAC, 60Hz
AC Power
230VAC,50HZ
Analog Outputs
1 user configurable output
0.1 V, 1 V, 5 V or 10 V
Range with 5% under/over-range
Analog Output Ranges
Analog Output Resolution
Digital Control Outputs
Digital Control Inputs
Status Outputs
1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)
12 opto-isolated outputs
12 opto-isolated outputs
12 opto-isolated outputs, 5 defined, 7 spare
2 ports: 1x RS-232; 1x RS-485 or RS-232 (configurable)
Communication speed: 300 - 115200 baud (user selectable)
Serial I/O
EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class
A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97)
Class A.
Certifications
IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95,
05744 Rev B
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table 2-3: M703E Specifications for Ozone Generator
Maximum Output
Minimum Output
Response Time:
Optical Feedback
6 ppm LPM
100 ppb LPM
180 Sec. (98%)
Standard
Table 2-4: M703E Specifications for O3 Photometer
Full Scale Range
Precision
100 ppb to 10 ppm ; User Selectable
1.0 ppb
Linearity
1.0% of Full Scale
Rise/Fall Time
Zero Drift
<20 sec (photometer response)
<1.0 ppb / 7 days
Span Drift
<1% / 24 hours; <2% / 7 days
800 cc3/min
Minimum Gas Flow Required
2.2. CE MARK COMPLIANCE
EMISSIONS COMPLIANCE
The Teledyne Instruments’ M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant with:
EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI
C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.
Test status: Pending.
SAFETY COMPLIANCE
The Teledyne Instruments’ M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator is designed to be fully compliant with:
IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95,
Test status: Pending.
6
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
2.3. WARRANTY
WARRANTY POLICY (02024D)
Prior to shipment, T-API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment failure occur, T-API
assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, T-API stands ready to provide on-site or in-plant
service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first
level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer.
NON-API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by T-API is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according
to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturers warranty.
GENERAL
During the warranty period, T-API warrants each Product manufactured by T-API to be free from defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service. Expendable parts are excluded.
If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period, API shall correct such defect by, in
API's discretion, repairing or replacing such defective Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product.
The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any Product: (i) that has been
altered or subjected to misuse, negligence or accident, or (ii) that has been used in any manner other than in
accordance with the instruction provided by T-API, or (iii) not properly maintained.
THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE REMEDIES
SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY
CONTAINED HEREIN. API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OF T-API'S PERFORMANCE
HEREUNDER, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
All units or components returned to Teledyne Instruments Incorporated should be properly packed for handling
and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the equipment will be
returned, freight prepaid.
USER NOTES:
05744 Rev B
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Specifications, Approvals and Warranty
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
8
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3. GETTING STARTED
3.1. UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP
CAUTION
THE M703E WEIGHS ABOUT 16.1 KG (35.5 POUNDS) WITHOUT OPTIONS
INSTALLED. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, WE RECOMMEND USING TWO
PERSONS TO LIFT AND CARRY THE CALIBRATOR.
1. Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged, please advise the shipper
first, then Teledyne Instruments.
2. Included with your calibrator is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on
your instrument at the factory. This record, titled Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 05760) is an
important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality
records file for this instrument.
3. Carefully remove the top cover of the calibrator and check for internal shipping damage.
Remove the set-screw located in the top, center of the Front panel.
Remove the 2 screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side towards the rear).
Slide the cover backwards until it clears the calibrator’s front bezel.
Lift the cover straight up.
NOTE
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the
human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will
void the instrument warranty.
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.
CAUTION
NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS, WIRING HARNESSES OR
ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER.
4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good
shape and properly seated.
5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they
are firmly and properly seated.
6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed. These are checked on
the paperwork accompanying the calibrator.
05744 Rev B
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
VENTILATION CLEARANCE: Whether the calibrator is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack,
be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
AREA
MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE
10 cm / 4 inches
Back of the instrument
Sides of the instrument
Above and below the instrument.
2.5 cm / 1 inch
2.5 cm / 1 inch
Various rack mount kits are available for this calibrator. See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information.
3.1.1. MODEL 703E CALIBRATOR
LOCKING SCREW
FASTENER
FASTENER
MESSAGE FIELD
MODE FIELD
KEYBOARD
KEY DEFINITION FIELD
ON / OFF SWITCH
STATUS LED’s
Figure 3-1:
M703E Front Panel Layout
Photometer
O3 Inlet
Photometer Gas
Connectors
O3 Outlet to
Photometer
O3 Generator
Exhaust
Optional Ethernet
Card
Status Outputs Control Outputs Analog Output
FAN
AC Power Cal Gas
Connector Outlets
Inlet for
Dry Air
Inlet for External
Zero Air Source
DCE-DTE COMM Ports
Switch
Control Inputs Serial No. Tag
Figure 3-2:
M703E Rear Panel Layout
10
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Ethernet PCA
AC Power
Connector
Gas Inlets & Outlets
installed here
(Optional)
Photometer
Pump
Back Panel
Motherboard
CPU PCA
Relay PCA
O3 Generator &
Photometer,
Pressure/Flow
Sensor PCA
O3 Generator
O3 Generator
Assembly
Dry Air
Pump Inlet
DC Power
supplies
Photometer
M/R Valve
Dry Air
Pump
Outlet
O3 Generator
Lamp Driver
Dry Air
Pump
Outlet to O3
Generator
Check
Valve
Pressure
Regulator
Inlet
1 LPM Flow
Control Assy.
Inlet to
Regulator
ON / OFF
Switch
Front Panel
5 LPM
Flow Control
Assy.
DFU Filters
Charcoal
Scrubber on
Top
Pressure
Regulator
Inlet
Figure 3-3:
M703E Internal Layout – Top View
05744 Rev B
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
3.2.1. POWER CONNECTION
Verify the correct line voltage and frequency configuration on the serial number tag on the rear panel of the
M703E.
Attach the power cord to the calibrator and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at
your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground.
CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE CALIBRATORS CASE
POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND CONNECTION.
DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG.
TURN OFF CALIBRATOR POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR
CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES.
CAUTION
DO NOT LOOK AT THE PHOTOMETER UV LAMP.
UV LIGHT CAN CAUSE EYE DAMAGE.
ALWAYS WEAR GLASSES MADE FROM SAFETY UV FILTERING GLASS
(PLASTIC GLASSES WILL NOT DO).
3.2.2. ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL CONNECTIONS
The M703E is equipped with an analog output channel accessible through a connector on the back panel of the
instrument. The standard configuration for this output is 0-5 VDC. It can be set by the user to output one of a
To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate analog output
connections on the rear panel of the calibrator.
Pin-outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are:
ANALOG OUT
+ –
Figure 3-5:
M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector
05744 Rev B
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.2.3. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS
The status outputs report calibrator conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of
DC current. These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as
programmable logic controllers (PLC’s). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40
VDC. All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.
NOTE
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external
device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be
used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will
drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the calibrator’s rear panel labeled STATUS. The
STATUS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
+
Figure 3-6:
The pin assignments for the Status Outputs are:
Status Output Connector
Table 3-1: Status Output Pin Assignments
OUTPUT
#
STATUS
DEFINITION
CONDITION
1
SYSTEM OK
Unassigned
CAL ACTIVE
DIAG
On, if no faults are present.
2
3
4
On if the calibrator is in GENERATE mode
On if the calibrator is in DIAGNOSTIC mode
On whenever a temperature alarm is active.
5
TEMP ALARM
6
PRESS ALARM
Unassigned
On whenever gas pressure alarm is active
7 & 8
D
Emitter BUSS
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together.
The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.
Digital Ground
D
+
Emitter BUSS
DC POWER
The emitters of the transistors on pins 9 to 16 are bussed together.
+ 5 VDC
14
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.2.4. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS
The calibrator is equipped with 12 digital control inputs that can be used to Initiate various user programmable
calibration sequences (see Section 6.5.1.5 for instructions on assigning the control inputs to specific calibration
sequences).
Access to these inputs is via 2 separate 10-pin connectors, labeled CONTROL IN, that are located on the
calibrator’s rear panel.
Table 3-2: M703E Control Input Pin Assignments
CONNECTOR
Top
INPUT
1 to 6
DESCRIPTION
Can be used as either 6 separate on/off switches or as bits 1 through
Can be used as either 6 separate on/off switches or as bits 7 through
Bottom
BOTH
7 to 12
Chassis ground.
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A – F. This can be from
an external source or from the “+” pin of the instruments STATUS
connector.
Top
U
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins G – L. This can be from
an external source or from the “+” pin of the instruments STATUS
connector.
Bottom
BOTH
U
Internal source of +5V that can be used to actuate control inputs when
connected to the U pin.
+
05744 Rev B
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from the pin labeled “+” is
the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be
used.
Example of Local Power Connections
Example of External Power Connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
U
+
7
8
9
10
11 12
U
+
7
8
9
10
11 12
U
+
5 VDC Power
Supply
+
-
Figure 3-7:
M703E Digital Control Input Connectors
16
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.2.5. CONNECTING THE CONTROL OUTPUTS
The calibrator is equipped with 12 opto-isolated, digital control outputs. These outputs are activated by the
M703E’s user-programmable, calibration sequences (see Section 6.5.1.6 for instructions on assigning the
control outputs to specific calibration sequences)
These outputs may be used to interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable
logic controllers (PLC’s), dataloggers, or digital relays/valve drivers.
CONTROL OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
E
Figure 3-8:
M703E Digital Control Output Connector
NOTE
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will draw. When connecting to a
unit that does not have this feature, external resistors must be used to limit the current through the
individual transistor outputs to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V supply).
The pin assignments for the control outputs are:
Table 3-3: M703E Control Input Pin Assignments
PIN #
1 - 12
E
STATUS DEFINITION
Outputs 1 through 12 respectively
Emitter BUSS
CONDITION
Closed if the sequence or sequence step activating output is operating
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together.
Digital Ground
The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.
05744 Rev B
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.2.6. CONNECTING THE SERIAL PORTS
If you wish to utilize either of the calibrator’s two serial interface COMM ports, refer to Section 7.1 of this manual
for instructions on their configuration and usage.
3.2.7. CONNECTING TO A LAN OR THE INTERNET
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments Ethernet card (Option 63 and 64), plug one end into the 7’ CAT5 cable
supplied with the option into the appropriate place on the back of the calibrator and the other end into any
nearby Ethernet access port.
NOTE:
The M703E firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP.
If your network also supports DHCP, the calibrator will automatically configure its LAN connection
appropriately,
If your network does not support DHCP, see Section 7.5.2.1 for instructions on manually configuring the
LAN connection.
3.2.8. CONNECTING TO A MULTIDROP NETWORK
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments RS-232 multidrop card (Option 62), see Section 7.3 for instructions on
setting it up.
18
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.3. PNENUMATIC CONNECTIONS
Figure 3-9:
Basic Pneumatic Setup of M703E
3.3.1. DRY AIR IN
When using the internal zero air pump, a source of dry air should be connected to the port labeled ‘Dry Air In’ on
the rear panel. This air should be supplied at atmospheric pressure. The supplied air should have a dew point
of –20 C or less.
Teledyne API can supply an optional desiccant cartridge that can be used to supply dry air to the M703E.
3.3.2. ZERO AIR IN
An external pressurized source of zero air can be supplied at the ‘Zero Air” port on the rear panel. This is the
standard configuration when the zero air pump is not installed. This zero air should be scrubbed of ozone and
have a dew point of -20 C or less. The pressure of the zero air should be regulated to 20-35 psig.
NOTE
When connecting an external source of zero air to an M703E with an internal zero air pump installed, the
zero air pump should be disabled.
05744 Rev B
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.3.3. OUTPUT MANIFOLD
A four-port output manifold is supplied on the rear panel of the M703E enabling simultaneous testing of up to two
external analyzers. Sample lines for ozone analyzers to be calibrated can be connected directly to this manifold.
To prevent ozone exposure, the bottom port of this manifold is used as a vent and should be connected to a
proper unpressurized vent manifold. It is important that the backpressure at this vent fitting be kept to a
minimum. If a vent line longer than 2 meters (~6 feet) is required, then 3/8” OD tubing should be used.
Any unused ports on this manifold must be capped.
3.3.4. EXHAUST
The port labeled ‘EXHAUST’ contains the exhaust gas from the internal photometer and may contain ozone.
This port should be connected to a proper unpressurized vent manifold to prevent ozone exposure.
3.3.5. MEASURING AN EXTERNAL OZONE SOURCE
The M703E can easily be configured to measure an external source of ozone.
USER NOTES
20
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.4. INITIAL OPERATION
If you are unfamiliar with the M703E theory of operation, we recommend that you read Chapter 9.
For information on navigating the calibrator’s software menus, see the menu trees described in Appendix A.1.
3.4.1. START-UP
After all of the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, turn on the instrument. The exhaust fan and
should start immediately. If the instrument is equipped with an internal photometer installed, the associated
pump should also start up.
The display should immediately display a single, horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display. This will
last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system.
Once the CPU has completed this activity, it will begin loading the calibrator firmware and configuration data.
During this process, string of messages will appear on the calibrator’s front panel display:
System waits 3 seconds
then automatically begins its
SELECT START OR REMOTE
START
:
3
initialization routine.
No action required.
.
CHECKING FLASH STATUS
:
1
System is checking the format of
the instrument’s flash memory
chip.
If at this point,
STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE
STARTING INSTRUMENT W/FLASH
:
1
**FLASH FORMAT INVALID**
appears, contact T–API customer service
The instrument is loading
configuration and calibration
data from the flash chip
:
1
The instrument is loading
the calibrator firmware.
M703E CALIBRATOR
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXX 50%_ _ _ _ _]
The revision level of the
firmware installed in your
analyzer is briefly displayed
SOFTWARE REVISION B.0
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXXXXX 80% _ _]
STANDBY
TEST
SYSTEM RESET
Firmware fully
booted
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP
Press CLR to clear initial
warning messages.
The calibrator should automatically switch to STANDBY mode after completing the boot-up sequence.
05744 Rev B
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.4.2. WARM UP
The M703E Photometric calibrator requires a minimum of 30 minutes for all of its internal components to reach a
stable operating temperature. During that time, various portions of the instrument’s front panel will behave as
follows. See Figure 3-1 for locations.
Table 3-4: Front Panel Display during System Warm-Up
Name
Color
Behavior
Significance
Displays Warning
messages and Test
Function values
At initial start up the various warning messages will appear
Main Message
Field
N/A
Displays
“STANDBY”
Mode Field
N/A
Instrument is in STANDBY mode.
STATUS LEDs
Unit is operating in STANDBY mode.
Active
Green
OFF
This LED glows green when the instrument is actively
producing calibration gas.
This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic
calibration sequence.
Auto
Fault
Yellow
Red
OFF
The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems
are not yet operating within their optimum ranges. Various warning
messages will appear.
BLINKING
3.4.3. WARNING MESSAGES
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside be specified limits during the calibrator’s
warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning
messages persist after the 30 minutes warm up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
guidelines in Chapter 11 of this manual.
To view and clear warning messages, press:
STANDBY
TEST
SYSTEM RESET
Suppresses the
warning messages
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP
STANDBY
SYSTEM RESET
MSG returns the active
warnings to the message
field.
TEST
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP
STANDBY
SYSTEM RESET
Press CLR to clear the current
TEST
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP
message.
If more than one warning is
active, the next message will take
its place.
SYSTEM
TEST
ANALOG CAL WARNING
CLR SETUP
Once the last warning has
been cleared, the MESSAGE
FIELD will return to displaying
the currently selected TEST
FUNCTION and value.
NOTE:
If a warning message persists after
several attempts to clear it, the message
may indicate a real problem and not an
artifact of the warm-up period
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
Table 3-5 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start up.
22
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table 3-5: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up
MESSAGE
MEANING
The calibrator’s A/D converter or at least one analog
input channel has not been calibrated.
ANALOG CAL WARNING
Stored Configuration information has been reset to the
factory settings or has been erased.
CONFIG INITIALIZED
DATA INITIALIZED
The calibrator’s data storage was erased.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the front
panel.
FRONT PANEL WARN
The firmware is unable to communicate with either the
O3 generator or photometer lamp I2C driver chips.
LAMP DRIVER WARN
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING
O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING
O3 PUMP WARNING
The O3 generator lamp temperature is outside of
allowable limits.
The O3 generator’s reference detector has dropped
below the minimum allowable limit.
The pump associated with the O3 photometer has failed
to turn on.
The photometer lamp temperature is outside of
allowable limits.
PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING
PHOTO REFERENCE WARNING
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
The photometer reference reading is outside of
allowable limits.
The calibrator’s motherboard was not detected during
power up.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the
calibrator’s relay board.
The calibrator has been turned off and on or the CPU
was reset.
SYSTEM RESET
05744 Rev B
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.4.4. FUNCTIONAL CHECK
7. After the calibrator’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the software
properly supports any hardware options that are installed.
8. Check to make sure that the calibrator is functioning within allowable operating parameters. Appendix C
includes a list of test functions viewable from the calibrator’s front panel as well as their expected values.
These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing problems with your calibrator (see Section7.5.2).
The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data sheet (part number 05760) lists these values before the
instrument left the factory.
To view the current values of these parameters press the following key sequence on the calibrator’s front
panel. Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized.
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST
TST> GEN STBY SEQ2 MSG CLR1 SETUP
ACT=GENERATE [Value] PPB O3
TARG=GENERATE [Value] PPB O3
OUTPUT FLOW=[Value] LPM
REG PRESSURE=[Value] PSIG
BOX TEMP=[Value]ºC
Toggle <TST TST> keys
to scroll through list of
functions
O3 GEN REF=[Value] MV
O3 GEN DRIVE=[Value] MV
O3 LAMP TEMP=[Value]ºC
PHOTO MEASURE[Value] MV
PHOTO FLOW=[Value] LPM
PHOTO LAMP TEMP=[Value]ºC
PHOTO SPRESS=[Value] IN-HG-A
PHOTO STEMP=[Value]ºC
PHOTO SLOPE=[Value]
1 Only appears when warning
messages are active.
2 Only appears when an one or
more calibration sequences are
programmed into the
PHOTO OFFSET=[Value] PPB
PHOTO STABIL=[Value] PPB
TEST=[Value]MV
calibrator’s memory.
TIME=[HH:MM:SS]
9. If your calibrator has an Ethernet card (Option 63) installed and your network is running a dynamic host
configuration protocol (DHCP) software package, the Ethernet option will automatically configure its
interface with your LAN. However, it is a good idea to check these settings to make sure that the DHCP
has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings from your network server (See Section
7.5.2).
If your network is not running DHCP, you will have to configure the calibrator’s interface manually (See
24
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.4.5. OPERATING MODES FOR THE O3 GENERATOR
The O3 generator can be set to operate in three different modes:
3.4.5.1. CNST (CONSTANT)
In this mode, the O3 output of the generator is based on a single, constant, drive voltage. There is no Feedback
loop control by the M703E’s CPU in this mode.
3.4.5.2. REF (REFERENCE)
The O3 control loop will use the reference detector’s measurement of the O3 generator’s UV lamp as input. This
mode does not use the photometer to control the ozone generator.
3.4.5.3. BNCH (BENCH)
The O3 concentration control loop will use the photometer’s O3 measurement as input.
THIS IS THE DEFAULT AND MOST COMMON MODE OF OPERATION.
This setting will be the default mode of the M703E calibrator and will be mused whenever the calibrator is using
the GENERATE AUTO command or the GENERATE sequence step to create a calibration mixture. When
either the GENERATE MAN command or the MANUAL sequence step is active, the local O3 generator mode
(chosen during when the command/step is programmed) will take precedence.
3.4.6. SETTING THE O3 GENERATOR MODE
To select a default O3 generator mode, press:
05744 Rev B
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Getting Started
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
3.4.7. SETTING THE M703E’S OUTPUT FLOW RATE
The output flow rate of the M703E should be adjusted to match the gas flow requirements of the analyzers
connected to the output manifold.
NOTE
The minimum total flow should equal the sum of the flow requirements of all of the instruments to
which the M703E will be supplying calibration gas plus 1 LPM excess flow.
Example: If the M703E is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures simultaneously to two
analyzers each requiring 0.8 LPM , the proper Total Flow output should be set at a minimum of:
(0.8 + 0.8) + 1.0= 2.6 LPM
To set the output flow:
1. Open the front panel of the calibrator down by releasing the two snap-in fasteners at the top of the front
panel.
2. Pull out the regulator knob and adjust the regulator until the desired flow is achieved.
The front panel of the M703E displays the approximate output flow based on the measured regulator
pressure, but this flow should be verified with an independent calibrated flow meter attached to the
3. Push the regulator knob back in to lock.
4. Close the front panel.
Pressure
Regulator
Adjustment
Knob
Figure 3-10:
Location of Pressure Regulator Adjustment Knob
USER NOTES:
26
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary
4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS AND
GLOSSARY
4.1. FAQ’S
The following list is a list from the T-API Customer Service Department of the 10 most commonly asked
questions relating to the Model 703E Photometric Calibrator.
Q: My ozone ACT =XXXX, why?
A: Look at the Photo Ref/Meas readings from the photometer UV lamp detector are most likely too low and need
Q: When I generate ozone, it takes a long time to settle out or it fluctuates around the target concentration until
finally stabilizing.
Q: Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display?
A: Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for
that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00.
Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.
Q: How do I make the RS-232 Interface Work?
Q: When should I change the sintered filter(s) in the calibrators flow control(s) and how do I change them?
A: The sintered filters do not require regular replacement. Should one require replacement as part of a
Q: How often should I rebuild the photometer pump on my calibrator?
A: The photometer pump has been designed for longer service life than standard diaphragm pumps. When the
pump wears out, the entire pump must be replaced.
Q: How long do the UV lamps of the O3 generator and photometer last?
A: The typical lifetime is about 2-3 years.
4.2. GLOSSARY
Acronym – A short form or abbreviation for a longer term. Often artificially made up of the first letters of the
phrase’s words.
APICOM – Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers
ASSY - Acronym for Assembly.
cm3 – metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter. Same as the obsolete abbreviation “cc”.
DIAG - Acronym for diagnostics, the diagnostic menu or settings of the system
DHCP: acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers that
automatically sets up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected
to the network.
05744 Rev B
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Frequently Asked Questions and Glossary
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
DOC – Acronym for Disk On Chip, the system’s central storage area for system operating system, firmware and
data. This is a solid-state device without mechanical, moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive
under DOS with disk drive label “C”. DOC chips come with 8 mb space in the E-series system standard
configuration but are available in larger sizes
DOS - Disk Operating System. The E-series systems use DR DOS
EEPROM - also referred to as a FLASH chip.
FEP - Acronym for Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that du Pont markets as
Teflon® (along with PFA and PTFE).
FLASH - flash memory is non-volatile, solid-state memory.
I2C bus – read: I-square-C bus. A serial, clocked serial bus for communication between individual system
components
IC – Acronym for Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic components
such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies.
iDAS - Acronym for Internal Data Acquisition System, previously referred to as DAS.
LAN - Acronym for local area network.
LED - Acronym for Light Emitting Diode.
LPM – Acronym for liters per minute
MFC – Acronym for “mass flow controller”.
MOLAR MASS – The molar mass is the mass, expressed in grams, of one mole of a specific substance.
Conversely, one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in
grams as the atomic mass of that substance.
EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams,
conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams.
Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements
PCA - Acronym for Printed Circuit Assembly, this is the PCB with electronic components installed and ready
to use
PCB - Acronym for printed circuit board, the bare circuit board without components
PLC – Acronym for programmable logic controller, a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic
level signal coming from the system
PFA – Acronym for Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon®
(along with FEP and PTFE).
PTFE – Acronym for Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may
react on other surfaces. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon® (along with FEP and PFA).
PVC – Acronym for Poly Vinyl Chloride.
RS-232 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port
RS-485 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port
SLPM – Acronym for standard liters per minute; liters per minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure
TCP/IP - Acronym for Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications protocol for
Ethernet devices and the Internet
VARS - Acronym for variables, the variables menu or settings of the system
USER NOTES:
28
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
This includes a brief description of the hardware and software options available for the M703E Photometric
Calibrator. For assistance with ordering these options, please contact the Sales department of Teledyne –
Advanced Pollution Instruments at:
TOLL-FREE: 800-324-5190
FAX: 858-657-9816
TEL: 858-657-9800
E-MAIL: [email protected]
WEB SITE: www.teledyne-api.com
5.1. CARRYING STRAP HANDLE (OPT 29)
The chassis of the M703E calibrator allows to attach a strap handle for carrying the instrument (Figure 5-). The
handle is located on the right side and pulls out to accommodate a hand for transport. When pushed in, the
handle is nearly flush with the chassis, only protruding out about 9 mm (3/8”).
Figure 5-1:
M703E with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets
Installing the strap handle prevents the use of the rack mount slides, although the rack mount brackets, Option
21, can still be used.
CAUTION
A FULLY LOADED M703E WITH BOTH THE O3 GENERATOR AND PHOTOMETER
OPTIONS INSTALLED WEIGHS ABOUT 16.3 KG (36 POUNDS).
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY
THE CALIBRATOR.
MAKE SURE TO DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE CALIBRATOR
BEFORE CARRYING IT.
05744 Rev B
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Optional Hardware and Software
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual
5.2. COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
5.2.1. RS232 MODEM CABLES (OPTS 60 AND 60A)
The analyzer can have come standard with a shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about 1.8 m
length, which should fit most computers of recent build. This cable can be ordered as Option 60.
Option 60A consists of a shielded, straight-through serial cable of about 1.8 m length to connect the calibrator’s
COM1 port to a computer, a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a
DB-25 female connector. The cable is terminated with one DB-9 female connector and one DB-25 male
connector. The DB-9 connector fits the calibrator’s RS-232 port.
5.2.2. ETHERNET CABLE (OPT 60B)
Option 60B consists of a 7-foot long, CAT-5 network cable, terminated at both ends with standard RJ-45
connectors. This cable is used to connect the M703E to any standard ETHERNET socket.
5.2.3. RS-232 MULTIDROP (OPT 62)
The multidrop option is used with any of the RS-232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight
calibrators with the host computer over a chain of RS-232 cables via the instruments COM1 Port. It is subject to
the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard.
CPU Card
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
Multidrop
Card
Figure 5-1:
M703E Multidrop Card
The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly, which plugs into to the calibrator’s CPU card (see Figure
5-6). It is connected to the RS-232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument’s back panel via a cable to the
motherboard. One option 62 is required for each calibrator along with one 6’ straight-through, DB9 male DB9
Female cable (P/N WR0000101).
30
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Optional Hardware and Software
5.2.4. ETHERNET (OPT 63)
The ETHERNET option allows the calibrator to be connected to any Ethernet local area network (LAN) running
TCP/IP. The local area network must have routers capable of operating at 10BaseT. If Internet access is
available through the LAN, this option also allows communication with the instrument over the public Internet.
Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS-232 port to 115.2 kBaud.
When installed, this option is electronically connected to the instrument’s COM2 serial port making that port no
longer available for RS-232/RS-485 communications.
The option consists of a Teledyne Instruments designed Ethernet card (see Figures 5-7 and 5-8), and a 7-foot
long CAT-5 network cable, terminated at both ends with standard RJ-45 connectors.
Figure 5-2:
M703E Ethernet Card
CPU
Card
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
Ethernet
Card
Female RJ-45
Connector
LNK LED
ACT LED
TxD LED
RxD LED
RS-232
Connector To
Motherboard
Interior View
Exterior View
Figure 5-3:
M703E Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed
For more information on setting up and using this option, see Section7.5
05744 Rev B
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Optional Hardware and Software
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual
5.2.5. ETHERNET + MULTIDROP (OPT 64)
This option allows the instrument to communicate on both RS-232 and ETHERNET networks simultaneously. It
includes the following:
RS232 MODEM CABLES (OPT 60A)
ETHERNET CABLE (OPT 60B)
RS-232 MULTIDROP (OPT 62)
ETHERNET (OPT 63
5.3. ADDITIONAL MANUAL (OPT 70)
Additional copies of the printed user’s manual can be purchased from the factory. Please specify the serial
number of your calibrator so that we can match the manual version.
This operator’s manual is also available on CD. The electronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc.
Portable Document Format (PDF) and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader® software, which can be
The electronic version of this manual can also be downloaded free at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.
Note that the online version is optimized for fast download and may not print with the same quality as the manual
on CD.
5.4. EXTENDED WARRANTY (OPT 92)
An extended, two-year warranty is available for the M703E calibrator. This option must be specified upon
ordering the calibrator.
5.5. NIST TRACEABLE, PRIMARY STANDARD CERTIFICATION
The Model 703E can be used as a Primary Ozone Standard. For this application the performance of the M703E
Photometric Calibrator calibrated to Standard Reference Photometer (SRP)
Calibrators ordered with this option are verified and validated in accordance with the procedures prescribed by
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50,
Appendix D (40 CFR Part 50).
An NIST traceable Certificate of Calibration and accompanies the instrument.
USER NOTES:
32
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
M703E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
34
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6. OPERATING THE M703E CALIBRATOR
The M703E calibrator is a computer-controlled calibrator with a dynamic menu interface for easy and yet
powerful and flexible operation. All major operations are controlled from the front panel display and keyboard
through these user-friendly menus.
To assist in navigating the system’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this manual.
NOTE
The flowcharts in this chapter depict the manner in which the front panel display/keyboard interface is
used to operate the M703E Photometric Calibrator.
They depict typical representations of the display during the various operations being described.
They are not intended to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your system.
NOTE
When editing values in the software, the ENTR key may disappear if you select a value that is invalid or
out of the allowable range for that parameter (e.g. such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00).
Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.
05744 Rev B
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.1. TEST FUNCTIONS
A variety of TEST FUNCTIONS are available for viewing at the front panel whenever the calibrator is at the
MAIN MENU. These measurements provide information about the present operating status of the calibrator and
are useful during troubleshooting (see Chapter 11). Table 6-1 lists the available TEST functions.
To view these TEST functions, press <TST or TST> from the main menu and the Test Functions will scroll at
the top center of the display.
Table 6-1: Test Functions Defined
TEST MEASUREMENT
DESCRIPTION
ACT=GENERATE XX PPB O3
Actual concentration being generated, computed from
real-time inputs.
TARG=GENERATE XX PPB O3
OUTPUT FLOW=X.XXX LPM
REG PRESSURE=XX.X PSIG
BOX TEMP=XX.X ºC
Target concentration to generate.
Output flow rate (computed from regulator pressure).
Regulator pressure.
Internal chassis temperature.
O3 GEN REF=XXXX.X MV
O3 GEN DRIVE=XXXX.X MV
O3 LAMP TEMP=XX.X ºC
O3 generator reference detector reading.
O3 generator lamp drive output.
O3 generator lamp temperature.
Photometer detector measure reading.
Photometer detector reference reading.
Photometer sample flow rate.
PHOTO MEASURE=XXXX.X MV
PHOTO REFERENCE=XXXX.X MV
PHOTO FLOW=X.XXX LPM
PHOTO LAMP TEMP=XX.X ºC
PHOTO SPRESS=XX.X IN-HG-A
PHOTO STEMP=XX.X ºC
Photometer lamp temperature.
Photometer sample pressure.
Photometer sample temperature.
PHOTO SLOPE=X.XXX
Photometer slope computed during zero/span bench
calibration.
PHOTO OFFSET=X.X PPB
PHOTO STABIL=X.X PPB
TEST=XXXX.X MV
Photometer offset computed during zero/span bench
calibration.
Photometer concentration stability (standard deviation of
25 bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds apart).
Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected
with TEST_CHAN_ID variable.
TIME=HH:MM:SS
Current instrument time of day clock. (24 hour format)
36
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.2. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES
The M703E calibrator software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the calibrator will be
operating in STANDBY mode. In this mode, the calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive although TEST
functions and WARNING messages are still updated can be examined via the front panel.
The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for performing certain
configuration operations, such as programming the concentration of source gases, setting up automatic
calibration sequences and configuring the analog / digital inputs and outputs. The SET UP mode is also used
for accessing various diagnostic tests and functions during troubleshooting.
Mode Field
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
GENERATE Key
STANDBY Key
Figure 6-1:
Front Panel Display
The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running.
Besides STANDBY and SETUP, other modes the calibrator can be operated in are:
Table 6-2: Calibrator Operating Modes
MODE
MEANING
DIAG
One of the calibrator’s diagnostic modes is being utilized. When
those diagnostic functions that have the greatest potential to
conflict with generating concentrations are active, the instrument
is automatically placed into standby mode.
GENERATE
In this mode, the instrument is engaged in producing calibration
gas.
SETUP3
SETUP mode is being used to configure the calibrator.
STANDBY
The calibrator is not actively generating gas.
3 The revision of the Teledyne Instruments software installed in this calibrator will be
displayed following the word SETUP. E.g. “SETUP B.4”
05744 Rev B
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.3. STANDBY MODE
When the M703E Photometric Calibrator is in standby mode, it is at rest.
Some functions under the SETUP MORE DIAG submenu, those which conflict with accurate
creation of calibration gas mixtures (e.g. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST) automatically place the
calibrator into STANDBY mode when activated
NOTE
The M703E calibrator should always be placed in STANDBY mode when not needed to produce
calibration gas.
This can be done manually by pressing the STBY button that appears when the calibrator’s display is
When programming a calibration sequences the STANDBY step should always be inserted at the end of
the sequence.
38
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.4. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE GENERATE MODE
The GENERATE mode is the mode of operation where the M703E is actively producing calibration gas, either
zero or some specified concentration of ozone. In the GENERATE mode the Zero Air Pump (if enabled) and
Photometer Pump are turned on.
6.4.1. GENERATE AUTO: Basic Generation of Calibration Gas
This is the simplest procedure for generating calibration gas mixtures. To generate calibration gas, press
The M703E will now enter GENERATE mode.
05744 Rev B
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.5. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION SEQUENCES
The M703E calibrator can be set up to perform automatic calibration sequences of multiple steps. These
sequences can perform all of the calibration operations available for manual operation and can be set up to be
triggered by using the front panel buttons, the M703E’s internal timer, the external digital control inputs, the RS-
232 interface, via the optional Ethernet interface or even as sub-processes in another sequence.
6.5.1. SETUP SEQ: PROGRAMMING CALIBRATION
SEQUENCES
A sequence is a database of single or multiple steps where each single step is an instruction that causes the
instrument to perform an operation. These steps are grouped under a user defined SEQUENCE NAME.
For each sequence, seven attributes must be programmed. They are:
Table 6-3: Automatic Calibration SEQUENCE Set Up Attributes
ATTRIBUTE NAME
DESCRIPTION
NAME
Allows the user to create a text string of up to 10 characters identifying the sequence.
Number of times, between 0 and 100, to execute the same sequence. A value of 0
(zero) causes the sequence to execute indefinitely.
REPEAT COUNT
CC INPUT
Specifies which of the M703E’s Digital Control Inputs will initiate the sequence.
Specifies which of the M703E’s Digital Control Outputs will be set when the sequence
is active.
CC OUTPUT
Enables or disables an internal automatic timer that can initiate sequences using the
M703E’s built in clock.
TIMER ENABLE
STEPS
A series of submenus for programming the activities and instructions that make up
the calibration sequence.
Allows the user to select the reporting style the calibrator uses to report the progress
of the sequences , on the front panels display, as it runs
PROGRESS MODE
The types of instruction steps available for creating calibration sequences are:
Table 6-4: Calibration SEQUENCE Step Instruction
INSTRUCTION NAME
GENERATE
DESCRIPTION
Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode. Similar in operation and effect to the
GENERATE AUTO function used at the front panel.
DURATION
Adds a period of time between the previous instruction and the next
Calls another sequence to be executed at this time. The calling sequence will
resume running when the called sequence is completed. Up to 5 levels of nested
sequences can be programmed.
EXECSEQ
Allows the sequence to activate the M703E’s digital control outputs. Similar to the
CC OUPUT attribute, but can be set and reset by individual steps.
SETCCOUTPUT
NOTE
It is generally a good idea to end each calibration sequence with an instruction to return the instrument
to STANDBY mode.
40
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
To create a sequence, use the instructions in the following sections to name the sequence, set it associated
parameters and define the steps to be included.
6.5.1.1. Activating a Sequence from the M703E Front Panel
To activate an already programmed sequence from the front panel, press:
05744 Rev B
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.5.1.2. Naming a Sequence
The first step of creating a calibration sequence is to assign it a name. The name can be up to 10 characters
and can be comprised of any alpha character (A to Z), and numeral (0 to 9) or the underscore character (“_“).
To assign a name to a sequence, press,
STANDBY
ACT CAL=0.000 LPM
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
GAS SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION
EDIT PRINT
EXIT
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the M703E.
OTHERWISE ...
SETUP X.X
END OF SEQUENCES
INS
PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME:0
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field
Edits the sequence shown
in the message field
Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences
SETUP X.X NAME:[0]
EXIT discards the
new NAME
<CH CH>
INS DEL
[0]
ENTER EXIT
Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.
ENTR accepts the
new NAME
Inserts a new a
character at the
cursor location.
Toggle this key to cycle
Deletes a
character at the
cursor location.
through the range of
numerals and available
characters:
(“A – Z”; “0 – 9” & “ _ ”)
42
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.5.1.3. Setting the Repeat Count for a Sequence
The sequence can be set to repeat a certain number of times, from 1 to 100. It can also be set to repeat
indefinitely by inputting a zero (0) into the REPEAT COUNTER.
To set the REPEAT COUNTER, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION
END OF SEQUENCES
EDIT PRINT
EXIT
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the M703E.
OTHERWISE ...
SETUP X.X
INS
PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME:0
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field
Edits the sequence shown
in the message field
Continue pressing SET> until ...
Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences
SETUP X.X REPEAT COUNT:1
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME:[0]
0
0
1
ENTER EXIT
EXIT discards the
new NAME
ENTR accepts the
new NAME
Toggle these keys to set the repeat count from 1 to 100.
Enter “0” to cause the sequence to loop indefinitely
05744 Rev B
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.5.1.4. Using the M703E’s Internal Clock to Trigger Sequences
Sequences can be set to trigger based on the M703E’s internal clock. The sequence can be set up to start at a
predetermined date and time. It can also be set to repeat after a predetermined delay time.
So activate and sequence timer, press:
44
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
To specify a starting time for the sequence, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
O3
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION
EDIT PRINT
EXIT
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the M703E.
OTHERWISE ...
SETUP X.X
END OF SEQUENCES
INS
PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME:0
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field
Edits the sequence shown
in the message field
Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences
Continue pressing SET> until ...
SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE:ENABLED
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
TIMER START: 01-JAN-06 00:00
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
TIMER START: 01-JAN-06 00:00
EXIT discards the
new setting
0
1
JAN
0
6
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new setting
Toggle these keys
to enter starting
day, month and
year.
DAY
MONTH YEAR
SYSTEM
1
TIME: 12:00
EXIT discards the
new setting
2
:0
0
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new setting
Toggle these keys
to enter the starting
time
HOUR
MINUTE
05744 Rev B
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
To set the delta timer, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
is in standby mode.
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION
END OF SEQUENCES
EDIT PRINT
EXIT
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the M703E.
OTHERWISE ...
SETUP X.X
INS
PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME:0
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field
Edits the sequence shown
in the message field
Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences
Continue pressing SET> until ...
SETUP X.X
TIMER DELTA: 001:00:00
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
TIMER DELTA: 0 Days
EXIT discards the
new setting
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to enter
number of days to wait
between before running
sequence again.
ENTR accepts the
new setting
SYSTEM
1
TIMER DELTA 00:00
:0
EXIT discards the
new setting
2
0
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the
Toggle these keys
to enter the starting
time
new setting
HOUR
MINUTE
46
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.5.1.5. Setting Up Control Inputs for a Sequence
The M703E calibrator’ control inputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source. This
feature allows the calibrator to operate in a slave mode so that external control sources, such as a data logger
can initiate the calibration sequences.
Each of the M703E calibrator’s control outputs, located on the back of the instrument (see Figure 3-2)
12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences or;
A 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration
sequences.
To assign a CC INPUT pattern / code to a particular sequence, press.
05744 Rev B
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.5.1.6. Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence
The M703E calibrator’s control outputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external source. This
feature allows the calibrator to control devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic
controllers (PLC’s), dataloggers, or digital relays/valve drivers.
They can be used as:
12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration sequences, or;
A 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to 4095 separate calibration
sequences.
They can be set to:
Be active whenever a particular calibration sequence is operating, or;
Activate/deactivate as individual steps within a calibration sequence are run See Section 6.5.2.5).
To assign a CC OUTPUT pattern / code to a particular sequence, press.
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION
END OF SEQUENCES
EDIT PRINT
EXIT
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the M703E.
OTHERWISE ...
SETUP X.X
INS
PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME:0
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field
Edits the sequence shown
in the message field
Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences
Continue pressing SET> until ...
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:DISABLED
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT ENABLE:OFF
EXIT discards the
OFF
ENTER EXIT
new setting
Toggle this key
turn the CC input
ON/OFF
ENTR accepts the
new setting
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:[0]00000000000
<CH CH> [0] ENTER EXIT
EXIT discards the
new setting
Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.
ENTR accepts the
new setting
Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON/OFF (0 or 1).
Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control
output pins located on the back of the M703E (see Figure 3-2),
The left most bit is Bit 1, the next bit to the right, bit 2,
progressing rightward to bit 12 (see Figure 3-10 for connector
pin assignments)
48
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.5.1.7. Setting the PROGRESS Reporting Mode for the Sequences
As sequences run, the M703E calibrator reports progress by displaying a message in the MODE field of the front
panel display (See Figure 3-1). There are several types of report modes available
Table 6-5: Sequence Progress Reporting Mode
MODE
DESCRIPTION
Shows the progress as the sequence name and step number. This is the traditional display.
Example: “SO2_Test-2”.
STEP
Shows the progress as a percent (0–100%) of the total sequence duration.
Example: “SEQ 48%”
PCT
Shows the progress as days, hours, minutes and seconds elapsed, counting up from 0.
Example (<1 day): “T+01:30:25” (i.e. 1 hour, 30 minutes, 25 seconds elapsed)
Example (>=1 day): “T+1d30:25” (i.e. 1 day, 30 hours, 25 minutes elapsed)
Shows the progress as days, hours, minutes, and seconds remaining, counting down to 0.
Example (<1 day): “T–01:30:25” (i.e. 1 hour, 30 minutes, 25 seconds remaining)
Example (>=1 day): “T–1d30:25” (i.e. 1 day, 30 hours, 25 minutes remaining)
ELAP
REM
To select a PROGRESS report mode, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION
END OF SEQUENCES
EDIT PRINT
EXIT
This display only appears if there are no sequences currently
programmed into the M703E.
OTHERWISE ...
SETUP X.X
INS
PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
1) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X NAME:0
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Deletes the sequence shown
in the message field
Edits the sequence shown
in the message field
Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences
Continue pressing SET> until ...
STEPS Submenu
SETUP X.X
PROGRESS MODE:REM
EDIT
<SET
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PROGRESS MODE:REM
STEP PCT ELAP REM
ENTR EXIT
Use these keys to choose
a PROGRESS MODE
SETUP X.X
PROGRESS MODE:ELAP
EDIT
<SET
EXIT
8
05744 Rev B
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.5.2.1. The Generate Step
This step operates and is programmed similarly to the GENERATE AUTO.
At the end of the programming sequence, the M703E firmware will automatically insert a DURATION step that
needs to be defined.
To insert a GENERATE step into a sequence, press:
Starting at the INSERT STEPS
Submenu
INSERT STEP Submenu
SETUP X.X
INSERT STEP: GENERATE
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
GENERATE:ZERO
ZERO ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to
switch between
ZERO AIR and O3
modes.
SETUP X.X
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
.0 PPB O3
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to
to scroll through the
available units of
measure
SETUP X.X
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
0
.0
0
1
0
PCT O3
EXIT discards the new
target concentration
ENTR accepts the new
target concentration
Toggle these keys
to set the target
concentration.
SETUP X.X
DURATION: 1.0 MIN
.0
0
0
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT
Toggle these keys
to set DURATION
of this step
SETUP X.X
3) DURATION : 10.0 MIN
INS DEL EDIT
PREV NEXT
05744 Rev B
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.5.2.2. The STANDBY Step
The STANDBY step places the calibrator into STANDBY mode
To insert a STANDBY step into a sequence, press:
6.5.2.3. The DURATION Step
The duration step causes the M703E to continue performing whatever action was called for by the preceding
step of the sequence.
If that step put the instrument into STANDBY mode, the calibrator stays in STANDBY mode for the
period specified by the DURATION step,
If that step put the instrument into GENERATE mode, the will continue to GENERATE whatever
calibration mixture was programmed into that step for the period specified by the DURATION step,
To insert a DURATION step into a sequence, press:
52
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.5.2.4. The EXECSEQ Step
The EXECSEQ step allows the sequence to call another, already programmed sequence. This is a very
powerful tool in that it allows the user to create a “toolbox” of often-used operations that can then be mixed and
matched by an overhead sequence:
To insert an EXECSEQ step into a sequence, press:
05744 Rev B
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.5.2.5. The CC OUTPUT Step
This instruction causes the sequence to set or reset the M703E’s digital control outputs. It is very useful in
situations where the control outputs are being used to trigger other devices that need to be turned off and on in
synch with the operation of the calibrator as it progress through the sequence.
To insert a CC OUTPUT step into a sequence, press:
Starting at the STEPS Submenu
INSERT STEP Submenu
SETUP X.X
INSERT STEP: GENERATE
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT
Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll though the
list of available instructions
SETUP X.X
INSERT STEP: PURGE
ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:DISABLED
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT ENABLE:OFF
EXIT discards the
OFF
ENTER EXIT
new setting
Toggle this key
turn the CC input
ON/OFF
ENTR accepts the
new setting
SETUP X.X CC OUTPUT:[0]00000000000
<CH CH> [0] ENTER EXIT
Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.
Toggle this key to turn the
selected bit ON/OFF
(0 or 1)
SETUP X.X
2) SET CC OUTPUT 000100010110
INS DEL EDIT EXIT
PREV NEXT
54
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.5.3. DELETING A SEQUENCE
To delete a sequence from the M703E calibrator’s memory, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
O3
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION
EDIT PRINT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
3) SEQ [NAME], [X] STEPS
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Scrolls back and forth between
existing sequences
SETUP X.X
DELETE SEQUENCES
YES NO
SEQUENCE DELETED
END OF SEQUENCES
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
INS
PRNT EXIT
56
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.6. SETUP CFG
Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument’s configuration information. This display lists the calibrator model,
serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU type and other information.
Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service.
Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here.
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
SETUP MENU
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
Press NEXT of PREV to move back and
forth through the following list of
Configuration information:
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
M703E Cailbrator
Press exit at
any time to
return to the
SETUP menu
MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER
PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
SOFTWARE REVISION
LIBRARY REVISION
EXIT
iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION (Only
appears if INET option is installed)
CPU TYPE & OS REVISION
DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
SAVED
05744 Rev B
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.7. SETUP CLK
6.7.1. SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S TIME AND DAY
The M703E has a time of day clock that supports the DURATION step of the calibration sequence feature, time
of day TEST function, and time stamps on most COM port messages. To set the clock’s time and day, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
SETUP X.X
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
TIME DATE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
TIME: 12:00
0
SETUP X.X
DATE: 01-JAN-05
1
2
:0
ENTR EXIT
0
1
JAN
0
5
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
keys to enter
current hour
Toggle these keys
to enter current day,
month and year.
HOUR
SETUP X.X
MINUTE
DAY MONTH YEAR
TIME: 22:30
SETUP X.X
DATE: 18-JUN-05
2
2
:3
0
ENTR EXIT
1
8
JUN
0
5
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
EXIT returns to
SETUP X.X
display
TIME DATE
EXIT
58
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.7.2. ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S SPEED
In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower, you can adjust a variable called CLOCK_ADJ
to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day. To change this variable, press:
05744 Rev B
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.8. SETUP PASS
The M703E provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized
adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item, the system will prompt the user
for a password anytime a password-protected function is requested.
There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator, maintenance and configuration
functions. Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level.
Table 6-6: Password Levels
PASSWORD
No password
101
LEVEL
MENU ACCESS ALLOWED
Operator
All functions of the MAIN menu: TEST, GEN, initiate SEQ , MSG, CLR
Access to Primary and Secondary Setup Menus except for VARS & DIAG
Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG
Maintenance
Configuration
818
To enable or disable passwords, press:
60
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the VARS or
DIAG submenus:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SYSTEM
0
ENTER SETUP PASS:0
Press individual
keys to set
number
0
1
0
ENTR EXIT
SYSTEM
8
ENTER SETUP PASS:0
8
EXAMPLE: This
password enables the
SETUP mode
ENTR EXIT
M703E enters selected menu
NOTE
The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus, even if
passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818) upon entering these menus. The
user only has to press ENTR to access the password-protected menus but does not have to enter the
required number code.
05744 Rev B
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.9. SETUP DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT: USING THE TEST
CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT
The M703E calibrator comes equipped with one analog output. It can be set by the user to carry the current
signal level of any one of the parameters listed in Table 6-8 and will output an analog VDC signal that rises and
falls in relationship with the value of the parameter.
Pin-outs for the analog output connector at the rear panel of the instrument are:
ANALOG OUT
+
–
Figure 6-2:
M703E the TEST CHANNEL Connector
6.9.1. CONFIGURING THE TEST CHANNEL ANALOG OUTPUT
6.9.1.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu.
Table 6-7 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the M703E calibrator.
Table 6-7: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions
SUB MENU
FUNCTION
AOUTS
CALIBRATED:
Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration
of all analog output channels.
CAL_OUT_1:
CAL_OUT_2
NOT USED ON THE M703E
TEST OUTPUT
Configures the 11 analog output:
RANGE1: Selects the DCV full-scale value of the output.
OVERRANGE: Turns the ± 5% over-range feature ON/OFF for this output channel.
REC_OFS1: Sets a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop.
AUTO_CAL1: Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration
CALIBRATED1: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this
one channel only.
AIN CALIBRATED
Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital
converter circuit on the motherboard.
1Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output.
To configure the analyzer’s TEST CHANNEL, set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the
outputs. This consists of:
10. Choosing a TEST CHANNEL function to be output on the channel.
11. Selecting a signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the
channel.
12. Determining if the over-range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly.
14. Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each channel (see
62
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
To access the analog I/O configuration sub menu, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
EXIT
Make sure that
the M703E is in
standby mode.
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
EXIT
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD:818
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
keys to enter the
correct
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
PASSWORD
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
AIO Configuration Submenu
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
ENTR
PREV NEXT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO
<SET SET> CAL
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT
Not used in the
M703E
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V,OVR, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT
DIAG AIO
AIN CALIBRATED: NO
<SET SET> CAL
05744 Rev B
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.9.1.2. Selecting a Test Channel Function to Output
The Test Functions available to be reported are:
Table 6-8: Test Channels Functions Available on the M703E’s Analog Output
TEST CHANNEL
DESCRIPTION
ZERO
FULL SCALE
NONE
TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF
O3 PHOTO MEAS
The raw output of the photometer during its
0 mV
0 mV
5000 mV*
5000 mV*
measure cycle
O3 PHOTO REF
O3 GEN REF
The raw output of the photometer during its
reference cycle
The raw output of the O3 generator’s
reference detector
0 mV
5000 mV*
OUTPUT FLOW
The gas flow being output through the CAL
GAS outlets on the back of the instrument
0 cm3/min
0 PSIG
0 "Hg
5,000 cm3/min
105 PSIG
REGULATOR PRESSURE
SAMPLE PRESSURE
The gas pressure measured by the O3
generator pressure sensor
The pressure of gas in the photometer
absorption tube
40 "Hg-In-A
SAMPLE FLOW
SAMPLE TEMP
The gas flow rate through the photometer
0 cm3/min
1000 cc3/min
The temperature of gas in the photometer
absorption tube
0 C
70 C
PHOTO LAMP TEMP
O3 LAMP TEMP
The temperature of the photometer UV lamp
0 C
70 C
The temperature of the O3 generator’s UV
lamp
0 mV
5000 mV
CHASSIS TEMP
The temperature inside the M703E’s chassis
0 C
70 C
(same as BOX TEMP)
O3 PHOTO CONC
The current concentration of O3 being
measured by the photometer.
1 ppm
0 C
Once a function is selected, the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the analog output, but also adds
TEST to the list of Test Functions viewable via the Front Panel Display.
64
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
To activate the TEST Channel and select a function press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
Make sure that
the M703E is in
standby mode.
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VAR DIAG
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
keys to enter the
correct
PASSWORD
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
DIAG
TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG
TEST CHANNEL:NONE
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to
choose a TEST
channel parameter
DIAG
TEST CHANNEL:CHASSIS TEMP
ENTR EXIT
EXIT discards the new
PREV NEXT
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting
05744 Rev B
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.9.1.3. TEST CHANNEL VOLTAGE RANGE Configuration
In its standard configuration the analog outputs is set to output a 0 – 5 VDC signals. Several other output
ranges are available (see Table 7-5). Each range has is usable from -5% to + 5% of the rated span.
Table 6-9: Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max
RANGE SPAN
0-100 mVDC
0-1 VDC
MINIMUM OUTPUT
-5 mVDC
MAXIMUM OUTPUT
105 mVDC
-0.05 VDC
1.05 VDC
0-5 VDC
-0.25 VDC
5.25 VDC
0-10 VDC
-0.5 VDC
10.5 VDC
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.
To change the output range, press,
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.9.1.1)
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
SET>
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
Pressing ENTR records
the new setting and
returns to the previous
menu.
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
These keys set
the signal level
and type of the
selected
Pressing EXIT ignores the
new setting and returns to
the previous menu.
DIAG AIO
0.1V
TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V
5V 10V ENTR EXIT
1V
channel
66
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.9.1.4. Turning the TEST CHANNEL Over-Range Feature ON/OFF
In its default configuration a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the M703E’s TEST CHANNEL output. This
over-range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current.
To turn the over-range feature on or off, press:
05744 Rev B
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.9.1.5. Adding a Recorder Offset to the TEST CHANNEL
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal be significantly different from the baseline of the
recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point. This can be achieved in
the M703E by defining a zero offset, a small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).
To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, press:
68
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.9.2. TEST CHANNEL CALIBRATION
TEST CHANNEL calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as
part of the configuration process) or whenever re-calibration is required. The analog outputs can be calibrated
automatically or adjusted manually.
During automatic calibration, the analyzer tells the output circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high-scale
point signal (usually about 90% of chosen analog signal scale) then measures actual signal of the output. Any
error at zero or high-scale is corrected with a slope and offset.
Automatic calibration can be performed via the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, or by using the CAL button
located inside TEST_CHANNEL submenu. By default, the analyzer is configured so that calibration of TEST
CHANNEL can be initiated with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command.
6.9.2.1. Enabling or disabling the TEST CHANNEL Auto-Cal Feature
To enable or disable the Auto-Cal feature for the TEST CHANNEL, press.
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
ENTR
PREV NEXT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
SET>
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL
NOTE:
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
TEST CHANNELS
configured for 0.1V full
scale should always be
calibrated manually.
output to be configured
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT
EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:ON
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
ENTR accepts
the new setting.
Toggle this key to
turn AUTO CAL
ON or OFF
(OFF = manual
calibration mode).
DIAG AIO
ON
TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:ON
EXIT ignores the
ENTR EXIT
new setting
DIAG AIO
OFF
TEST_OUTPUT: AUTO CAL.:OFF
ENTR EXIT
05744 Rev B
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.9.2.2. Automatic TEST CHANNEL Calibration
To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, press:
NOTE
Before performing this procedure, make sure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned OFF for CONC_OUT_1
and CONC_OUT_2,
Make sure that the AUTO CAL feature is turned ON for the TEST CHANNEL (See Section 6.9.2.1)
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
ENTR
PREV NEXT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
SET>
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
NOT AUTO CAL. CONC_OUT_1
NOT AUTO CAL. CONC_OUT_2
This message
appears when
AUTO-CAL is
Turned OFF for
a channel
Analyzer
automatically
calibrates all
channels for which
AUTO-CAL is turned
ON
DIAG AIO
AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT
If any of the channels have not
been calibrated ot if at least one
channel has AUTO-CAL turned
OFF, this message will read NO.
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED: YES
SET> CAL
EXIT
NOTE:
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely
matched to the characteristics of the recording device.
70
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
To initiate an automatic calibration from inside the TEST CHANNEL submenu, press:
05744 Rev B
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.9.2.3. Manual Calibration of the TEST CHANNEL configured for Voltage Ranges
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.
NOTE:
The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO-CAL feature
is turned off for the channel being adjusted (see Section6.9.2.1)
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals (See Figure 6-2) and by
changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100, 10 or 1 count increments.
V
+DC Gnd
Figure 6-3:
Setup for Calibrating the TEST CHANNEL
Table 6-10: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration
MINIMUM
ADJUSTMENT
(1 count)
FULL
SCALE
ZERO
TOLERANCE
SPAN
TOLERANCE
SPAN VOLTAGE
0.1 VDC
1 VDC
±0.0005V
±0.001V
±0.002V
±0.004V
90 mV
900 mV
4500 mV
4500 mV
±0.001V
±0.001V
±0.003V
±0.006V
0.02 mV
0.24 mV
1.22 mV
2.44 mV
5 VDC
10 VDC
72
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.9.1.1.)
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
ENTR
PREV NEXT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
SET>
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL
Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: RANGE: 5V
SET> EDIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: CALIBRATED:NO
EXIT
<SET SET> CAL
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: VOLT-Z: 0 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT
These keys increase / decrease
the analog output signal level
(not the value on the display)
by 100, 10 or 1 counts.
These menu’s
only appear if
AUTO-CAL is
turned OFF
Continue adjustments until the
voltage measured at the output
of the analyzer and/or the input
of the recording device matches
the value in the upper right hand
corner of the display (within the
tolerances
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: VOLT-S: 4500 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT
DIAG AIO
TEST_OUTPUT: CALIBRATED: YES
EXIT
listed in Table 6-10
<SET SET> CAL
05744 Rev B
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.9.3. AIN CALIBRATION
This is the sub-menu calibrates the analyzer’s A-to-D conversion circuitry. This calibration should only be
necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies.
To perform an AIN CALIBRATION, press:
74
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.10. SETUP MORE VARS: INTERNAL VARIABLES (VARS)
The M703E has several-user adjustable software variables, which define certain operational parameters.
Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using
the VARS menu.
The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level. See Appendix
A2 for a detailed listing of all of the M703E variables that are accessible through the remote interface.
Table 6-11: Variable Names (VARS)
ALLOWED
VALUES
DEFAULT
VALUES
NO.
VARIABLE
DESCRIPTION
58ºC
Warning limits
Sets the photometer lamp temperature set
point and warning limits.
PHOTO_LAMP1,2
0ºC and 100ºC
0
56ºC - 61ºC
48ºC
Warning limits
Sets the O3 generator lamp temperature set
point and warning limits.
O3_GEN LAMP1,2
0ºC and 100ºC
1
43ºC - 53ºC
Set the upper span point of the O3
concentration range for TEST CHANNEL
analog signal O3_PHOTO_CONC.
0.1–20000 ppb
500 ppb
O3_CONC_RANGE
2
O3 bench control flag.
ON turns on the photometer pump and
switches measure/reference valve only
when the O3 mode is set for BNCH (See
Section 3.4.5).
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY2
OFF
3
4
Internal zero air pump control.
ZA_PUMP_ENAB2
ON
ON turns on internal zero air pump when
generating ozone.
Sets the standard Temperature used in
calculating O3 flow rates and concentrations.
STD_TEMP1
0ºC and 100ºC
29.92 in-Hg-A
25ºC
5
6
Sets the standard pressure used in
calculating O3 flow rates and concentrations.
15.00 – 50 .00
in-Hg-A
STD PRESSURE1
Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock.
Choose the + sign if the clock is too slow,
choose the - sign if the clock is too fast (See
Section 6.7.2).
-60 to +60 s/day
Default=0
0
CLOCK_ADJ
7
1 DO NOT ADJUST OR CHANGE these values unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments’ customer service
personnel.
2 Only available in calibrators with O3 photometer and generator options installed.
NOTE:
There is a 2-second latency period between when a VARS value is changed and the new value is stored
into the analyzer’s memory.
DO NOT turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be lost.
05744 Rev B
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following key sequence:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to enter
the correct PASSWORD
SETUP X.X
0) O3_PHOTO_LAMP=58.0 DegC
EDIT PRNT EXIT
In all cases:
EXIT discards the new
DO NOT CHANGE
these settings unless
specifically instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments’
Customer Service
NEXT JUMP
setting
ENTR accepts the
SETUP X.X
1) O3_PHOT_LAMP=58.0 DegC
EDIT PRNT EXIT
personnel
new setting
PREV NEXT JUMP
SETUP X.X
2) O3_CONC_RANGE=500.0 PPB
EDIT PRNT EXIT
PREV NEXT JUMP
SETUP X.X
O3_CONC_RANGE=500.0 PPB
.0 ENTR EXIT
0
0
5
0
0
Toggle these keys to set
the upper span point of the
O3_PHOTO_CONC Test
Channel signal
SETUP X.X
3) O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY=OFF
ENTR EXIT
OFF
0
Toggle this key turn this
mode ON / OFF
SETUP X.X
4) ZA_PUMP_ENAB=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
ZA_PUMP_ENAB=ON
ON
ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key turn this
SETUP X.X
5) STD_TEMP=25.0 DegC
mode ON / OFF
DO NOT CHANGE
these settings unless
specifically instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments’
Customer Service
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
6) STD PRESS=29.92 In-Hg
personnel
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
7) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
PREV
JUMP
EDIT ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
ENTR EXIT
+
0
0
Enter sign and number of
seconds per day the clock
gains (-) or loses(+)
76
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.11. OPERATING THE M703E CALIBRATOR AS AN O3
PHOTOMETER
The M703E can easily be configured to measure an external source of ozone.
6.11.1. SET UP FOR OPERATING THE M703E AS AN O3
PHOTOMETER
To convert the M703E from an O3 calibrator to and O3 photometer:
1. Remove the two loop-back tubing assemblies on the rear panel connected to the ‘PHOTO IN’ and
‘PHOTO REF IN’ fittings.
2. Connect the ozone source to be measured to the ‘PHOTO IN’ fitting.
This gas must be supplied at atmospheric pressure.
3. Connect a reference gas (Zero Air) for the photometer to the ‘PHOTO REF IN.’
This gas must be supplied at atmospheric pressure. To avoid interference effects, the reference gas
should be from the same source than is being used to feed the ozone generator that is being
assayed.
REFERENCE GAS
SOURCE
O3 SOURCE TO BE
MEASURED
PHOTOMETER INLET
1
PHOTOMETER OUTLET
Capped
PHOTOMETER ZERO IN
PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT
EXHAUST line: Max Length=3 meters ( or 10 feet)
EXHAUST
ZERO AIR IN
VENT
CAL GAS OUT
CAL GAS OUT
DRY AIR IN
Capped
M703E
Photometric
O3 Calibrator
Minimum input gas flow for
Photometer is 800 cc3/min
1
Figure 6-4:
Set up for Using the M703E to Measure an External O3 Source
05744 Rev B
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
To use the M703E as a photometer, press:
78
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.12. SETUP LVL: SETTING UP AND USING LEADS (DASIBI)
OPERATING LEVELS
6.12.1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LEADS LEVELS
The M703E calibrator can be equipped with a version of firmware that includes support for LEADS, a data
collection and analysis system LEADS specifically designed for handling meteorological and environmental data
particularly when there is a need to integrate data and control instrumentation from several different
manufacturers. When an M703E calibrator is equipped with the optional LEADS software is used in conjunction
with data loggers located central data analysis facility is possible to collect and buffer data between the various
calibrators, analyzers and metrological equipment remotely located at an air monitoring station.
Because LEADS was originally developed for use with TNRCC using Dasibi 5008 calibrators, the LEADS
version of the M703E includes support for Dasibi “Dot” serial data commands and operational “LEVEL’s”.
NOTE
For more information on the LEADS system, please go to http://www.meteostar.com/.
6.12.2. DOT COMMANDS
The Dasibi “Dot” commands form a text-based (ASCII) data protocol that is transmitted between a control
computer (XENO data logger in this case) and a calibrator or ambient gas analyzer over an RS-232 connection.
The details of the protocol are beyond the scope of this document, but in its simplest form the protocol is based
on a two or three digit integer preceded by a control-A and a period (.) and then followed by a “!” and a two digit
checksum.
EXAMPLE:
^A.xxx!nn
For further information on dot commands, please contact T-API customer service.
An M703E equipped with LEADS software can be simultaneously operated over the same COM port using
standard Teledyne Instruments’ serial data commands and is compatible with APIcom versions 3.7.3 and later
which include an added feature that allows a user to edit, upload and download level tables.
05744 Rev B
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.12.3. LEVELS
A LEVEL is a combination of several parameters:
An ID number for the LEVEL
An action, (e.g. GENERATE, STANDBY)
A target concentration value
An output flow rate (if applicable)
Configuration for one or both of two status output blocks.
Up to twenty levels can be defined and used with the M703E using a range of ID numbers from 0-98. Level 99
is reserved for standby. Are not time based and do not include characteristics such as start time or duration,
therefore a single LEVEL can not switch between different concentration levels and flow rates. Separate flow
and concentration outputs must be programmed into separate LEVELs which are then individually started and
stopped either by an operator at the calibrator’s front panel or through a serial data operation over the RS-232 or
Ethernet ports.
6.12.4. ACTIVATING AN EXISTING LEVEL
To activate an existing defined LEVEL, press:
80
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.12.5. PROGRAMMING NEW LEVELS
To begin programming a new LEVEL find the LVL submenu by pressing:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
LEVL SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE EXIT
This display only appears if there are no LEVELs currently
programmed into the M703E.
OTHERWISE ...
SETUP X.X
END OF LEVELS
INS
PRNT EXIT
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X [LEVEL ID] ) [Gas/Conc.], [Status Block Set]
CHOOSE ACTION Submenu
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE
PREV NEXT
Deletes the LEVEL shown
in the message field
Edits the LEVEL shown in
the message field
Scrolls back and forth between
Use these keys to scroll though the available
instructions: GENERATE & MANUAL
existing LEVELS
05744 Rev B
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.12.5.1. Creating a GENERATE LEVEL
To create a LEVEL using the M703E’s AUTO generation function, press:
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu
CHOOSE ACTION Submenu
SETUP X.X
ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
GENERATE:ZERO
ZERO ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to scroll
through the available
gas types (as
programmed during
initial setup.
SETUP X.X
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
.0 PPB O3
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to
to scroll through the
available units of
measure
Toggle these keys
to set the target
concentration.
SETUP X.X
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
PCT O3
0
.0
0
0
ENTR EXIT
EXIT discards the
new setting
STANDBY
0
LEVEL:0
0
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT discards the new
Toggle these keys until
LEVEL number
the designation of the
existing defined level
program is reached.
ENTR accepts the new
LEVEL number
82
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating the M703E Calibrator
6.12.5.2. Creating a MANUAL LEVEL
To create a level using the M703E’s MANUAL generation function, press:
Starting at the CHOOSE ACTION Submenu
CHOOSE ACTION Submenu
SETUP X.X
NEXT
ACTION TO PERFORM:GENERATE
ENTR EXIT
Use the NEXT until ...
SETUP X.X
INSERT STEP: MANUAL
PREV
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
O3 GEN MODE: OFF
REF: The concentration control
loop will use the generator’s
reference detector as input.
This Key
Turns the the
O3 Generator
OFF/ON
OFF CNST REF BNCH
ENTR EXIT
BNCH: The concentration
control loop will use the
photometer bench.
These keys set a target
This key sets a CONSTANT drive
concentration for the O3 Generator
voltage for the O3 Generator
SETUP X.X
O3 GEN SET POINT: 000.0 PPB
SETUP X.X
O3 GEN SET POINT: 0.0 MV
0
0
0
0
.0
ENTR EXIT
0
0
0
0
.0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys
to set output
CONCENTRATION
of the O3 generator
Toggle these keys
to set the
CONSTANT drive
voltage of the O3
generator
STANDBY
0
LEVEL:0
EXIT discards the new
0
ENTR
EXIT
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting
EXIT discards the new
Toggle these keys until
the designation of the
existing defined level
program is reached.
LEVEL number
ENTR accepts the new
LEVEL number
05744 Rev B
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.12.5.3. Editing or Deleting a LEVEL
To edit or delete an existing LEVEL, press:
Levels are displayed according to the following Format:
LEVEL ID: Any number between 0 and 99. This will be the number used to select the level when
activating / deactivating it, or when editing or deleting it.
Gas Conc: The concentration setting, in ppb, for the O3 generator to produce.
Status Block Setting: This will be displayed as two pairs of 1-digit numbers.
The First pair corresponds to Status Block 1.
The Second pair corresponds to Status Block 2.
n each case:
The left digit will be a number between 1 and 4 representing the binary setting of bits 1 through 4
and;
The right digit will be a number between 1 and 4 representing the binary setting of bits 5 through 8.
84
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
6.12.6. CONFIGURING LEVEL STATUS BLOCKS
There are two STATUS BLOCKS associated with LEADS LEVELS.
BLOCK 1: This block corresponds to the physical CONTROL OUTPUT connections located on the back
panel of the M703E (see Figure 3-2, Figure 3-8 and Section 3.2.5).
BLOCK 2: The second status block does not correspond to any physical output but is used to
communicate status over the serial data port
To configure the either of the STATUS BLOCKS, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3 LEVL SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE EXIT
See
Figure 6-5
SETUP X.X [LEVEL ID] )[Gas/Conc.],[Status Block Set’g]
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Toggle these keys until
the number of the
LEVEL to be edited is
reached.
SETUP X.X LEVEL NUMBER:12
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until Desired
Status Block is reached
SETUP X.X STATUS BLOCK 2:DISABLED
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X STATUS BLOCK 2:OFF
EXIT discards the
OFF
ENTER EXIT
new setting
Toggle this key
turn the CC input
ON/OFF
ENTR accepts the
new setting
SETUP X.X STATUS BLOCK 2:[0]0000000
<CH CH> [0] ENTER EXIT
EXIT discards the
Moves the
cursor one
character left or
right.
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting
Toggle this key to turn the selected bit ON/OFF (0 or 1).
Each bit shown on the display represents one of the control
output pins located on the back of the M703E (see Figure 3-2),
The left most bit is Bit 1, the next bit to the right, bit 2,
progressing rightward to bit 8
(see Figure 3-8 for connector pin assignments)
86
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7. OPERATING THE M703E OVER THE SERIAL I/O
PORTS
7.1. USING THE ANALYSER’S COMMUNICATION PORTS
The M703E is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel accessible via 2 DB-9
connectors on the back panel of the instrument (See Figure 3-2). The COM1 connector is a male DB-9
connector and the COM2 is a female DB9 connector.
Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with, issue commands to, and receive
data from the calibrator through an external computer system or terminal.
The RS-232 port (COM1) can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 multidrop mode (option
62; See Section 5.2.3 and7.3.
The COM2 port can be configured for standard RS-232 operation, half-duplex RS-485 communication or
for access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Instruments’ Ethernet interface card (see Section 5.2.4
and 7.5).
7.1.1. RS-232 DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data
communication equipment (DCE). Basic data terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are
always considered DCE devices.
Electronically, the difference between the DCE & DTE is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data
Transmit functions.
DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
A switch located below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to switch between DTE (for use with
data terminals) or DCE (for use with modems). Since computers can be either DTE or DCE, check your
computer to determine which mode to use.
05744 Rev B
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
7.1.2. COMM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS AND CONNECTOR PIN
ASSIGNMENTS
Received from the factory, the calibrator is set up to emulate an RS-232 DCE device.
RS-232 (COM1): RS-232 (fixed), DB-9 male connector.
o
o
o
Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Parity: None.
COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS 485), DB-9 female connector.
o
o
o
Baud rate: 115000 bits per second (baud).
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
Parity: None.
Female DB-9 (COM2)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
Male DB-9 (RS-232)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
TXD
TXD
GND
GND
RXD
RXD
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
7
8
9
CTS
CTS
RTS
RTS
(DTE mode)
(DTE mode)
RXD
GND
TXD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RTS
CTS
(DCE mode)
Figure 7-1:
Default Pin Assignments for Back Panel COMM Port connectors (RS-232 DCE & DTE)
The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10-pin
connectors on the CPU card, CN3 (COM1) and CN4 (COM2).
CN3 & CN4
(Located on CPU card)
CTS
RTS
RXD
2
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
1
9
GND
TXD
(As seen from inside analyzer)
Figure 7-2:
Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector (RS-232).
88
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
Teledyne Instruments offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.
Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection of the
serial ports of most personal computers. Also available as Option 60 (See Section 5.2.1).
Part number WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most common
styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches.
Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional adapters.
NOTE
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring
that makes the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne Instruments
for pin assignments before using.
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are activity indicators
just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the calibrator and a computer or modem, both
the red and green LEDs should be on.
If the lights are not lit, use the small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes
If both LEDs are still not illuminated, make sure the cable properly constructed.
05744 Rev B
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
7.1.3. COMM PORT BAUD RATE
To select the baud rate of either one of the COM Ports, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID
COM1 COM2
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODE:0
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
Toggle these keys to
cycle through the
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
available Baud rates:
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
300
1200
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
SETUP X.X
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
ENTR EXIT
EXIT discards the new
PREV NEXT
setting
115200
ENTR accepts the
new setting
90
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.1.4. COMM PORT COMMUNICATION MODES
Each of the calibrator’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes, listed in Table
7-1. As modes are selected, the calibrator sums the Mode ID numbers and displays this combined number on
the front panel display. For example, if quiet mode (01), computer mode (02) and Multi-Drop-enabled mode (32)
are selected, the Calibrator would display a combined MODE ID of 35.
Table 7-1: COMM Port Communication Modes
MODE1
QUIET
ID
1
DESCRIPTION
Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the calibrator (such as warning messages)
to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a
computer program where such intermittent messages might cause communication
problems.
Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them.
Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
communicating with a computer operated control program.
COMPUTER
SECURITY
2
4
When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only
command that is active is the help screen (? CR).
When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings
from
No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit
to
E, 7, 1
2048
Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit
Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
over multidrop mode if both are enabled.
RS-485
1024
32
MULTIDROP
PROTOCOL
Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.
ENABLE
MODEM
Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the
RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.
64
ERROR
Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.
CHECKING2
128
256
XON/XOFF
Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.
HANDSHAKE2
Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE
8
HARDWARE
FIFO2
Disables the HARDWARE FIFO (First In – First Out), When FIFO is enabled it
improves data transfer rate for that COM port.
512
COMMAND
PROMPT
Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.
4096
1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP MORE COMM COM[1 OR 2] MODE menu
2 The default setting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments’ Customer
Service personnel.
Note
Communication Modes for each COM port must be configured independently.
05744 Rev B
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Press the following keys to select communication modes for a one of the COMM Ports, such as the following
example where RS-485 mode is enabled:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID
COM1 COM2
EXIT
Combined Mode ID
displayed here
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODE:0
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 QUIET MODE:OFF
PREV NEXT OFF
Use the PREV and
NEXT Keys to
between the
available modes
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
SETUP X.X
COM1 RS-485 MODE:OFF
Activate / Deactivate
the Selected mode
by toggling the ON /
OFF key
PREV NEXT OFF
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 RS-485 MODE:ON
EXIT discards the new
PREV NEXT OFF
ENTR EXIT
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting
PREV and NEXT Keys to continue selecting other
COM modes you want to enable or disable
92
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.1.5. COMM PORT TESTING
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COM menu. This test sends a string of
256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running, the red LED on the rear panel of the
calibrator should flicker.
To initiate the test press the following key sequence.
05744 Rev B
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
7.1.6. MACHINE ID
Each type of Teledyne Instruments calibrator is configured with a default ID code. The default ID code for all
M703E calibrators is 700. The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same
communications channel such as when several calibrators are on the same Ethernet LAN, in a RS-232 multidrop
chain (See Section 7.3) or operating over a RS-485 network (See Section 7.4). If two calibrators of the same
model type are used on one channel, the ID codes of one or both of the instruments needs to be changed so
To edit the instrument’s ID code, press:
The ID number is only important if more than one calibrator is connected to the same communications channel
(e.g., a multi-drop setup). Different models of Teledyne Instruments’ calibrators have different default ID
numbers, but if two calibrators of the same model type are used on one channel (for example, two M703E’s), the
ID of one instrument needs to be changed.
The ID can also be used for to identify any one of several calibrators attached to the same network but situated
in different physical locations.
94
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.1.7. TERMINAL OPERATING MODES
The M703E can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports. As
terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the calibrator supports two communicate modes
specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices.
Computer mode is used when the calibrator is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface
program.
Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a “dumb”
computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the calibrator in this mode are listed in Table
7-2.
7.1.7.1. Help Commands in Terminal Mode
Table 7-2: Terminal Mode Software Commands
COMMAND
Control-T
Function
Switches the calibrator to terminal mode
(echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF,
the interface can be used in interactive
mode with a terminal emulation program.
Control-C
Switches the calibrator to computer mode
(no echo, no edit).
CR
A carriage return is required after each
command line is typed into the
(carriage return)
terminal/computer. The command will not
be sent to the calibrator to be executed until
this is done. On personal computers, this is
achieved by pressing the ENTER key.
BS
Erases one character to the left of the
cursor location.
(backspace)
ESC
Erases the entire command line.
(escape)
? [ID] CR
This command prints a complete list of
available commands along with the
definitions of their functionality to the
display device of the terminal or computer
being used. The ID number of the
calibrator is only necessary if multiple
calibrators are on the same
communications line, such as the multi-
drop setup.
Control-C
Control-P
Pauses the listing of commands.
Restarts the listing of commands.
05744 Rev B
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
7.1.7.2. Command Syntax
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers, keywords, data
values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND <CR>
Where
X
is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed designators
are listed in Table 6-27 and Appendix A-6.
[ID]
is the machine identification number (Section 7.1.6). Example: the Command “? 200”
followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of
software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200.
COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being issued (LIST,
ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have additional arguments that define
how the command is to be executed. Press ? <CR> or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of
available command designators.
<CR>
is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return (usually
achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer).
Table 7-3: Teledyne Instruments Serial I/O Command Types
COMMAND
COMMAND TYPE
Calibration
Diagnostic
C
D
L
Logon
T
Test measurement
Variable
V
W
Warning
7.1.7.3. Data Types
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean expressions and text
strings.
Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter length, etc.
They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits. For example, +1, -12,
123 are all valid integers.
Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of the two
characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming
language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all
valid hexadecimal integers.
96
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points,
time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by
zero or more digits, an optional decimal point and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear
before or after the decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -
0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.
Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may assume only two
values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.
Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types, such as
data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They consist of a quotation mark,
followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a
final quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not
possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string.
Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items. When using these
commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you cannot abbreviate any names.
7.1.7.4. Status Reporting
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS-232 interface (the
other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic
format). You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (Section 7.1.4,
Table 7-1).
Status reports include warning messages, calibration and diagnostic status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3
for a list of the possible messages, and this for information on controlling the instrument through the RS-232
interface.
General Message Format
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>
Where:
X
is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message type, as
shown in the Table 6-27.
DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It consists of the
Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of the day (HH) as a number
from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59.
[ID]
is the calibrator ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.
MESSAGE
is the message content that may contain warning messages, Test Functions, variable
values, etc.
<CRLF>
is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.
The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy
structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was
issued, hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal
emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.
05744 Rev B
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
7.1.7.5. COM Port Password Security
In order to provide security for remote access of the M703E, a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a
password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE (Mode
4, Section 7.1.4). Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply.
A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.
If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be achieved with the
LOGOFF command.
Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be
disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.
If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.
The following messages will be returned at logon:
LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given
LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect
LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully
To log on to the M703E calibrator with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:
LOGON 940331
940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as
follows:
V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN
Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.
98
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.2. REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM
The M703E can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between the calibrator’s
COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from Teledyne Instruments with part
number WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure:
The DTE-DCE is in the DCE position.
The M703E COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem,
The Modem is designed to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.
The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned ON (Mode 64, see Section 7.1.4).
Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the calibrator.
The default setting for this feature is
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0
This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long.
To change this setting press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODE:0
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
Continue pressing <SET or SET> until ...
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
COM1 PORT INIT:AT Y0 &DO &H &I0
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
<SET SET> EDIT
ID
COM1 COM2
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 PORT INIT:AT Y0 &DO &H &I0
[A] ENTR EXIT
EXIT discards the
<CH CH> INS DEL
The <CH and CH>
keys move the cursor
left and right along the
text string
new setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting
The INS and CH> key
inserts a new
character before the
cursor position
Toggle this key to cycle through the
available character set:
The DEL
deletes
character at
the cursor
position
Alpha: A-Z (Upper and Lower
Case);
Special Characters: space ’ ~ ! # $
% ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < > | ; : , . / ?
Numerals: 0-9
05744 Rev B
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
To Initialize the modem press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3 SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID
COM1 COM2
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COM1 MODE:0
<SET SET> EDIT
Continue pressing <SET or SET> until ...
SETUP X.X
COM1: INITIALIZE MODEM
ENTR EXIT
<SET SET> INIT
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZING MODE
MODEM INITIALIZED
Test Runs
Automatically
PREV NEXT OFF
EXIT
If there is a problem initializing the
modem the message,
“MODEM NOT INITIALIZED”
will appear.
100
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.3. MULTIDROP RS-232 SET UP
The RS-232 multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3, CN4 and CN5 connectors
of the CPU card and the cabling to connect it to the calibrator’s motherboard. This PCA includes all circuitry
required to enable your calibrator for multidrop operation. It converts the instrument’s COM1 port to multidrop
configuration allowing up to eight Teledyne Instruments E-Series calibrators or E-Series analyzers to be
connected the same I/O port of the host computer.
Because both of the DB9 connectors on the calibrator’s back panel are needed to construct the multidrop chain,
COM2 is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation; however, with the addition of an Ethernet
Option (option 63, See Section5.2.4 and 7.5) the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT
LAN.
JP2
CPU Card
Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)
Cable to
Ethernet
Card
Multidrop
PCA
Cable to
Motherboard
Figure 7-3:
Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62)
Each calibrator or analyzer in the multidrop chain must have:
One Teledyne Instruments Option 62 installed.
One 6’ straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cable (Teledyne Instruments P/N WR0000101) is
required for each calibrator.
To set up the network, for each instrument:
4. Turn the instrument on and change its MACHINE ID code to a unique 4-digit number.
5. Remove the top cover of the instrument and locate JP2 on the multidrop PCA (7-4)
6. Make sure that the jumpers are in place connection pins 9 10 and 11 12.
7. If the instrument is to be the last instrument on the chain, make sure a jumper is in place connecting pins
21 22.
8. If you are adding an instrument to the end of an already existing chain, do not forget to remove JP2, pins
21 22 on the multidrop PCA on the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain.
9. Close the instrument.
05744 Rev B
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
10. Using straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cables, interconnect the host and the calibrators as
shown in Figure 6-14.
NOTE:
Teledyne Instruments recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the first instrument
and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.
KEY:
Host
Female DB9
RS-232 port
Male DB9
TAPI Analyzer
Last
INSTRUMENT
COM2
CALIBRATOR
CALIBRATOR
COM2
COM2
COM2
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
Make Sure
Jumper between
JP2 pins 21 22
is installed.
Figure 7-4:
RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Calibrator Interconnect Diagram
102
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.4. RS-485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This port can be re-configured
for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a
maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet. If you require full-duplex or
isolated operation, please contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
To reconfigure COM2 as an RS-285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position (see Figure 7-6).
The RS-485 port can be configured with or without a 150 Ω termination resistor. To include the resistor,
install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board (see Figure 7-6). To configure COM2 as an un-
terminated RS-485 port leave JP3 open.
CN4
COM2 – RS-232
CN3
COM1 – RS-232
JP3
CN5
COM2 – RS-485
SW1
Pin 6
Figure 7-5:
CPU card Locations of RS-232/485 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers
05744 Rev B
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
When COM2 is configured for RS-485 operation the port uses the same female DB-9 connector on the back of
the instrument as when Com2 is configured for RS-232 operation, however, the pin assignments are different.
Female DB-9 (COM2)
(As seen from outside analyzer)
RX/TX-
GND
RX/TX+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(RS-485)
Figure 7-6:
Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.
The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6-pin connector on the
CPU card, CN5.
CN5
(Located on CPU card)
RX/TX
-
GND
RX/TX+
2
1
4
3
6
5
(As seen from inside analyzer)
Figure 7-7:
CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.
104
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.5. REMOTE ACCESS VIA THE ETHERNET
When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface, the calibrator can be connected to any standard 10BaseT
Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP
device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the calibrator using
APICOM, terminal emulators or other programs.
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate (115,200
kBaud) for the COM2 port. Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated, the COM2 submenu is replaced
by a new submenu, INET. This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN
or Internet Server(s).
The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the calibrator, indicating its current operating status.
Table 7-4: Ethernet Status Indicators
LED
LNK (green)
ACT (yellow)
TxD (green)
RxD (yellow)
FUNCTION
ON when connection to the LAN is valid.
Flickers on any activity on the LAN.
Flickers when the RS-232 port is transmitting data.
Flickers when the RS-232 port is receiving data.
7.5.1. ETHERNET CARD COM2 COMMUNICATION MODES AND
BAUD RATE
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for the COM2 port. The
baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud.
7.5.2. CONFIGURING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE OPTION USING
DHCP
The Ethernet option for you M703E uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to configure its interface
with your LAN automatically. This requires your network servers also be running DHCP. The calibrator will do
this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network. Once the
instrument is connected and turned on, it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra set
up steps or lengthy procedures.
NOTE
It is a good idea to check the INET settings the first time you power up your calibrator after it has been
physically connected to the LAN/Internet to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the
appropriate information from you network server(s).
The Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the calibrator’s front panel.
05744 Rev B
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table 7-5: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties
PROPERTY
DEFAULT STATE
DESCRIPTION
This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF.
DHCP STATUS
On
Editable
EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON
INSTRUMENT
IP ADDRESS
Configured by
DHCP
This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
192.168.76.55.) is the address of the calibrator itself.
EDIT key
A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
Configured by
DHCP
disabled when address (e.g. 192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the
DHCP is ON
computer used by your LAN to access the Internet.
Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
255.255.252.0) that identifies the LAN to which the device
is connected.
EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON
Configured by
DHCP
All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must
have the same subnet mask. Any transmissions sent to
devices with different subnet masks are assumed to be
outside of the LAN and are therefore routed through a
gateway computer onto the Internet.
SUBNET MASK
This number defines the terminal control port by which
the instrument is addressed by terminal emulation
software, such as Internet or Teledyne Instruments’
APICOM.
Editable, but
DO NOT
CHANGE
TCP PORT
3000
The name by which your calibrator will appear when
addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the
Internet. The default setting for all Teledyne Instruments
M703E calibrators is “M703E”.
HOST NAME
M703E
Editable
The host name may be changed to fit customer needs.
1 Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
personnel.
NOTE
If the gateway IP, instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes (e.g. “0.0.0.0”), the DCHP was not
successful in which case you may have to configure the calibrator’s Ethernet properties manually.
See your network administrator.
106
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
To view the above properties listed in Table 7-5, press:
05744 Rev B
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
7.5.2.1. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses
There are several circumstances when you may need to configure the interface settings of the calibrator’s
Ethernet card manually. The INET sub-menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card’s configuration
properties
Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package,
The DHCP software is unable to initialize the calibrator’s interface;
You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones
automatically chosen by DHCP.
Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two-step process.
STEP 1: Turn DHCP OFF: While DHCP is turned ON, the ability to set INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and
SUBNET MASK manually is disabled
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID ADDR INET
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD:818
ENTR EXIT
8
1
8
SETUP X.X
DHCP:ON
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
ON
DHCP:ON
Toggle this key
to turn DHCP
ON/OFF
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
OFF
DHCP:OFF
ENTR accepts
the new setting
EXIT ignores the
new setting
Continue to Step 2 Below
108
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
STEP 2: Configure the INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing:
Internet Configuration Keypad Functions
From Step 1 above)
KEY
[0]
FUNCTION
Press this key to cycle through the range of
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)
<CH CH>
DEL
Moves the cursor one character left or right.
Deletes a character at the cursor location.
SETUP X.X
DHCP: OFF
Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
ENTR
EXIT
SET> EDIT
EXIT
EXIT
Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
Some keys only appear as needed.
SETUP X.X INST IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT
Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets
SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH>
DEL [0]
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0
<CH CH> DEL [?] ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000
<SET
EDIT
EXIT
The PORT number needs to remain at 3000.
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.
Pressing EXIT from
any of the above
display menus
causes the Ethernet
option to reinitialize
its internal interface
firmware
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATION FAILED
Contact your IT
Network Administrator
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID
INET
COM1
EXIT
05744 Rev B
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
7.5.3. CHANGING THE CALIBRATOR’S HOSTNAME
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the calibrator appears on your network. The default name for all
Teledyne Instruments M703E calibrators is M703E. To change this name (particularly if you have more than
one M703E calibrator on your network), press.
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD:818
ENTR EXIT
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
8
1
8
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
DHCP:ON
COMM VARS DIAG
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ID ADDR INET
EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: TMS 9000
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: TMS 9000
KEY
FUNCTION
Moves the cursor one character to the left.
<CH
CH>
INS
<CH CH> INS DEL
[?]
ENTR EXIT
Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Inserts a character before the cursor location.
Deletes a character at the cursor location.
DEL
Press this key to cycle through the range of
numerals and characters available for
insertion. 0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * (
) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
Use these key to edit the HOSTNAME
[?]
Accepts the new setting and returns to the
previous menu.
ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: TMS 9K–STACK 2
[?] ENTR EXIT
Ignores the new setting and returns to the
previous menu.
<CH CH> INS DEL
ENTR accepts
the new setting
EXIT ignores the
new setting
Some keys only appear as needed.
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZING INET 0%
INITIALIZATION process proceeds
automatically
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATION FAILED
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
Contact your
IT Network
ID ADDR INET
EXIT
Administrator
110
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
7.6. APICOM REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAM
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows the user to access and control any of
Teledyne Instruments’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection through direct
cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user can:
Establish a link from a remote location to the M703E through direct cable connection via RS-232 modem
or Ethernet.
View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when
standing in front of the instrument.
Remotely edit system parameters and set points.
Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.
Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload iDAS configurations.
Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.
APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and trouble-shooting. Figure 7-8 shows
examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front
panel
Figure 7-8:
APICOM Remote Control Program Interface
NOTE
APICOM is included free of cost with the calibrator and the latest versions can also be downloaded for
free at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
The M703E calibrator is fully supported by APICOM revision 3.9.4 and later.
Instruments with the LEADS support option must run APICOM revision 4.0 and later
05744 Rev B
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Operating The M703E over the Serial I/O Ports
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
112
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8. M703E CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION
Basic electronic calibration of the M703E Calibrator is performed at the factory. Normally there is no need to
perform this factory calibration in the field however, the performance of several of the instruments key
subsystems should be verified periodically and if necessary adjusted. These subsystems are:
O3 Photometer: The O3 photometer performance should be periodically verified against an external
standard (see Section 8.1).
O3 Generator: The O3 generator should be periodically calibrated (see Section 8.2).
8.1. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE M703E’S O3
PHOTOMETER
The accuracy of calibration gas produced by the M703E depends entirely on the accuracy of the photometer;
therefore, it is very important that the photometer is operating properly and accurately.
The verification procedure can be performed using the instruments internal O3 generator (see Figure 8-1) or an
external source of O3 (see Figure 8-2). In either case, an external source of zero air (such as a Teledyne
Instruments’ Model 701 Zero Air Generator) is required.
8.1.1. SETUP FOR VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE O3
PHOTOMETER
Note
This operation requires an external reference photometer.
05744 Rev B
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Figure 8-1:
Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Using Internal O3 Generator
Figure 8-2:
Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Using an External O3 Generator
NOTE
The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented to simplify the drawing.
All unused ports should be capped.
A Minimum of 1.1 LPM is required for the external zero air source
8.1.1.1. Calibration Manifold Exhaust/Vent Line
The manifold’s excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of the room. This vent should be of large
enough internal diameter to avoid any appreciable pressure drop, and it must be located sufficiently downstream
of the output ports to assure that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion.
NOTE
It is recommended that the calibration manifold’s exhaust vent have a minimum internal diameter of 3/8
inch and a maximum length of 3 meters (or 10 feet)
114
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8.1.2. VERIFYING O3 PHOTOMETER PERFORMANCE
To verify the performance of the M703E’s optional internal photometer perform the following steps:
STANDBY
ACT=STANDBY
Make sure that the
M703E is in
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
STANDBY mode
STANDBY
AUTO
SYSTEM RESET
STANDBY
GENERATE:ZERO
ZERO ENTR SETUP
Toggle this key to
switch to O3
generation mode
STANDBY
0
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
PPB O3
0
4
0
0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys
to set the target
concentration.
Toggle this key to
set the units of
measure.
STANDBY
0
GENERATE:0.0 PPB O3
PPB O3
0
0
ENTR EXIT
GENERATE
ACT = 400 PPB O3
Wait
A MINIMUM
OF
<SET SET> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
10 MINUTES
or until the
ACT reading
settles down
Record O3 concentration readings displayed by the ACT
test function and by the external reference photometer
Repeat this procedure for as many points along the
performance range of the M703E as required
NOTE
The readings recorded from the M703E’s ACT test function and the external reference photometer
should be within 1% of each other.
05744 Rev B
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
8.1.3. CALIBRATING THE O3 PHOTOMETER
The following procedure sets values held in the calibrator’s memory of for zero point OFFSET and SLOPE.
8.1.3.1. Photometer Zero Calibration
To set the zero point offset for the M703E Photometric Calibrator’s photometer, press:
116
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
8.1.4. O3 PHOTOMETER DARK CALIBRATION
The Dark Calibration Test turns off the Photometer UV Lamp and records any offset signal level of the UV
Detector-Preamp-Voltage to Frequency Converter circuitry. This allows the instrument to compensate for any
voltage levels inherent in the Photometer detection circuit that might affect the output of the detector circuitry and
therefore the calculation of O3 concentration.
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
O3 GAS CONFIG
MODE ADJ PHOT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
O3 GAS CONFIG
BCAL DARK
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
CALIBRATING DARK OFFSET
DARK CAL 34% COMPLETE
The DARK CAL procedure progresses automatically
until ...
Yes
DARK CAL
Successful?
No
SETUP X.X INVALID DARK CAL OFFS=XXXX.X MV
118
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8.2. CALIBRATING THE O3 GENERATOR
The M703E calibrator’s software includes a routine for automatically calibrating the O3 generator. A calibration
table of drive voltages stored in the M703E’s memory is the basis for this calibration. This table is used by the
M703E to set initial O3 generator drive settings.
8.2.1. O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION TABLE
When the M703E is operated in BENCH mode, this table is used for the initial setting only. After a short delay
time, the bench feedback control will take over and control the O3 generator drive to servo in to the exact
concentration requested.
When the M703E is operated in CONST mode, the initial O3 generator drive setting will be set by the calibration
table and does not change.
When the M703E is operated in REF mode, the calibration table sets the initial drive setting and then the
reference detector feedback takes over to maintain the lamp at a constant intensity as measured by the
reference detector. The target value for the reference detector for a particular target concentration is also stored
in this calibration table.
The instrument software will interpolate between two values in the table when an intermediate concentration is
requested.
For each point included in the table used by the M703E to calibrate the optional O3 generator the user can set a
drive voltage and a dwell time for that point. Each point can also be individually turned off or on.
05744 Rev B
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
8.2.2. VIEWING O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS
To view these calibration points, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
EXIT
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to enter
the correct PASSWORD
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
DIAG
O3 GEN CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG
O3 GEN CALIBRATION
CAL PNTS
DIAG O3GEN
1) 500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Toggle these keys to move
between calibration points
120
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8.2.5. TURNING O3 GENERATOR CALIBRATION POINTS ON / OFF
To enable or disable an existing calibration point, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD
DIAG
O3 GEN CALIBRATION
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT
Toggle these keys to enter
the correct PASSWORD
DIAG
O3 GEN CALIBRATION
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
CAL PNTS
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
DIAG O3GEN
1) 500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
Continue pressing PREV & NEXT until your
reach the point to be turned ON/OFF
DIAG O3GEN
8) 1500 MV, 5.0 MIN, ON
PREV NEXT
INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT
DIAG O3GEN
CAL. POINT DRIVE:0 MV
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG O3GEN
CAL. POINT ENABLELD:ON
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
DIAG O3GEN
CAL. POINT ENABLELD:ON
EXIT discards
the new setting
ON
ENTR EXIT
Toggle this key to turn the
point ON / OFF
ENTR accepts
the new setting
05744 Rev B
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8.3. M703E GAS PRESSURE SENSOR CALIBRATION
The M703E Calibrator has two sensors that monitor the pressure of the gases flowing through the instrument.
The data collected by these sensors is used to compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in
atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU’s memory as test functions:
Table 8-1: M703E Pressure Sensors
ASSOCIATED
TEST FUNCTION
PRESSURE MONITOR
MEASUREMENT POINT
SENSOR
UNITS
PSIG
Regulator Pressure Sensor
Capped fitting on backside of regulator
assembly. See Figure 8-4
REG PRESSURE
Use monitor to measure ambient
atmospheric pressure at the calibrator’s
location.
Photometer Sample Gas
Pressure Sensor
PHOTO SPRESS
IN-HG-A
8.3.1.1. Gas Pressure Sensor Calibration Set Up
The procedures described in this section require an independent, calibrated pressure meter/monitor be attached
at the following location.
M703E Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH
Pressure
Monitor
DRY AIR
IN
O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
Filter
PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR
Pressure
Regulator
On Back Panel
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA
PHOTOMETER
INLET
REF/MEAS
Valve
Flow Control
(800 cm3)
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
PUMP
EXHAUST
ZERO AIR
IN
PUMP
PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT
INTERNAL
VENT
PHOTOMETER
OUTLET
TO ANALYZER
TO ANALYZER
VENT
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Figure 8-3:
Pressure Calibration Monitor Points
05744 Rev B
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Attach Pressure
Monitor Here
Outlets to
O3 Generator
Pressure
Regulator
Figure 8-4:
O3 Generator Pressure Monitor Point Physical Location– M703E
126
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8.3.2. CALIBRATING THE REGULATOR AND PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSORS
1. Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover.
2. Connect a pressure meter to the Regulator Pressure measurement fitting. This fitting is located on the
backside of the regulator assembly (see Figure 8-4).
3. Turn on the calibrator and perform the following steps:
4. Turn OFF the M703E, remove the pressure monitor, replace the cap on the pressure measurement
fitting.
05744 Rev B
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
8.4. M703E GAS FLOW CALIBRATION
The M703E has two gas flow characteristics that affect its performance: the flow of gas thought the sample
chamber of the instrument’s photometer and the total gas flow being output. While both are stored in the
calibrator’s memory and used to compensate the final concentration calculations for changes in atmospheric
pressure, they are calculated quite differently.
PHOTOMETER SAMPLE GAS FLOW RATE:
This flow rate is measured directly by a flow sensor located pressure / flow sensor PCA. A slope factor, stored
in the calibrator’s memory the last time a PHOTO FLOW calibration operation (see Section 8.4.1) was
performed, is and applied to the reading from that sensor.
The calculated photometer sample gas flow value is viewable on the instrument’s front panel using the PHOTO
FLOW test function and can be output via the M703E’s TEST CHANNEL output using the SAMPLE FLOW
function.
OUTPUT GAS FLOW RATE:
This flow rate is calculated by applying a separate slope factor, also stored in the calibrator’s memory, to an
interpolated valued based on the following table of internal gas pressure as measured by the O3 gas input
pressure sensor. The output-flow slope value is determined by performing an OUPUT FLOW calibration
operation (see Section 8.4.2).
Table 8-2: M703E Gas Pressure to Output Flow conversion Table
M703E REGULATOR PRESSURE TO OUTPUT FLOW
PSIG
0
LPM
0.000
0.676
1.214
1.659
2.071
2.463
2.816
3.178
3.536
3.851
4.166
5.744
7.282
8.755
10.254
11.695
13.146
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
The calculated OUTPUT FLOW value is viewable on the instrument’s front panel using the OUTPUT FLOW test
function and can be output via the M703E’s TEST CHANNEL using the OUTPUT FLOW function.
128
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8.4.1. CALIBRATING THE PHOTOMETER’S SAMPLE GAS FLOW
NOTE
The procedure described in this section requires an independent, calibrated gas flow meter/monitor be
connected to the EXHAUST fitting on the back of the M703E.
During the PHOTO FLOW calibration, the M703E software automatically turns the DC pump downstream from
the photometer ON.
To perform a PHOTO FLOW calibration, press:
05744 Rev B
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
8.4.2. CALIBRATING THE OUTPUT GAS FLOW
8.4.2.1. Output Gas Flow Set Up
The procedure described in this section requires an independent, calibrated flow meter/monitor and the following
set up:
Figure 8-5:
Output Flow Calibration Monitor Point
130
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E Calibration and Verification
8.4.2.2. Performing an Output Gas Flow Calibration
During the PHOTO FLOW calibration, the M703E software automatically turns the DC pump downstream from
the photometer OFF and the AC dry air pump ON. To perform a PHOTO FLOW calibration, press:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
An external flow
meter is needed to
perform this
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
operation.
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to enter
the correct PASSWORD
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
DIAG
FLOW CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG FCAL
WAITING FOR FLOW
DIAG FCAL ACTUAL PHOTO FLOW: 1.000 LPM
.0 ENTR EXIT
DON NOT press the ENTR button
at this point.
1
0
0
0
Doing so will cause the slope
applied to the Output Flow reading
be recalculated.
DIAG FCAL
WAITING FOR FLOW
DIAG FCAL ACTUAL OUTPUT FLOW: 1.000 LPM
.0 ENTR EXIT
1
0
0
0
EXIT discards the new
Toggle these keys to
match the actual flow as
measured by the external
flow meter
setting
ENTR accepts the
new setting
05744 Rev B
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibration and Verification
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
132
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
134
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9. THEORY OF OPERATION
9.1. PNEUMATIC OPERATION
9.1.1. GAS FLOW CONTROL
Gas flow rates are set by various flow control assemblies located in the gas stream(s).
9.1.1.1. Flow Control Assemblies
Figure 9-1:
Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies
9.1.1.2. Photometer Critical Flow Orifice
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate without moving
parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a
pressure differential is created. This pressure differential combined with the action of the calibrator’s pump
draws the gas through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop, the speed that the gas
flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is
greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio
05744 Rev B
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
stays at least 2:1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure
because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the
sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice.
The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on the size and shape of
the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass
through the orifice.
9.1.2. INTERNAL GAS PRESSURE SENSORS
There are two pressure sensors in the M703E. See Figure 3-3 for the location of the Pressure/Flow PCA.
A 100 psig pressure sensor on this PCA is used to monitor the downstream regulator pressure. This value is
displayed on the front panel as a test measurement called REG PRESSURE.
A second pressure located on the rear PCA measures the pressure of gas in the photometer’s absorption tube.
This sensor is a 0-15 psia (absolute pressure) range sensor. This data is used by the CPU when calculating the
O3 concentration inside the absorption tube. This value is displayed on the front panel as a test measurement
called PHOTO SPRESS. Note that this value is converted to units of Inches of Mercury (IN-HG-A) when
displayed on the front panel.
136
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.2. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
9.2.1. OVERVIEW
Analog Outputs
TEST
‘
Status Outputs
1 - 8
CHANNEL
OUTPUT
Aout 4
Aout 3
Aout 2
Aout 1
Optional
Multidrop
Card
COM
1
Control Outputs
1 - 12
COM
2
Control Inputs
1 - 12
Optional
Ethernet
Card
Analog Outputs
(D/A)
External Digital I/O
RS-232
or RS-485
Power Up
Circuit
O3 Generator Input
Pressure Sensor
PC 104
CPU Card
RS-232
Disk on
Chip
Photometer Sample Gas
Pressure Sensor
PC 104 Bus
Flash
Chip
Box
Temperature
CPU
Status
LED
Photometer
M/R Valve
(Optional)
I2C Bus
Thermistor Interface
Photometer
Lamp Heater
O3 Generator
RELAY
PCA
O3 Generator
Reference
Detector
UV
Lamp
O3 Generator
Lamp Heater
O3 Generator
UV Lamp
Temperature
Photometer
UV Lamp
Temperature
I2C
Status
LED
O3 Generator
Lamp Supply
Photometer
Pump
Photometer Sample Gas
Temperature
Keyboard
& Display
Absorption tube
Photometer
Lamp Power
Supply
Photometer
Detector
Preamp
Photometer
Detector
Figure 9-2:
M703E Electronic Block Diagram
At its heart, the calibrator is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal processes, interprets data,
makes calculations, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Instruments. It
communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral
devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the Mother Board.
The motherboard collects data, performs signal conditioning duties and routs incoming and outgoing signals
between the CPU and the calibrator’s other major components.
Data is generated by the various sub components of the M703E (e.g. flow data from the MFC’s, O3
concentration from the optional photometer). Analog signals are converted into digital data by a unipolar,
analog-to-digital converter, located on the motherboard.
05744 Rev B
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the calibrator’s major components, again
through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard. These status reports are used as data for the
concentration calculations and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU. They are
stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners:
Through the calibrator’s keyboard and vacuum florescent display over a clocked, digital, serial I/O bus
(using a protocol called I2C);
RS 232 & RS485 serial I/O channels;
Via an optional Ethernet communications card:
Various digital and analog outputs, and
A set of digital control input channels.
Finally, the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I2C bus) located on a
separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters,
motors and valves.
9.2.2. CPU
The CPU is a low power (5 VDC, 0.8A max), high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a version of
the DOS operating system. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC-104 specification, version 2.3 for
embedded PC and PC/AT applications. It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock
rate over an internal, 32-bit data and address bus. Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4-channel,
direct memory access (DMA) devices over data busses of either 8-bit or 16-bit bandwidth. The CPU supports
both RS-232 and RS-485 serial protocols. Figure 9-3 shows the CPU board.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways:
Through the calibrator’s keyboard and vacuum fluorescence display over a clocked, digital, serial I/O bus
using the I2C protocol (read I-square-C bus)
RS-232 and/or RS-485 serial ports (one of which can be connected to an Ethernet converter)
Various analog voltage and current outputs
Several digital I/O channels
Figure 9-3:
M703E CPU Board Annotated
138
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
Finally, the CPU issues commands (also over the I2C bus) to a series of relays and switches located on a
separate printed circuit assembly, the relay board (located in the right rear of the chassis on its own mounting
bracket) to control the function of heaters and valves. The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage,
one disk-on-chip and one or two flash chips.
9.2.2.1. Disk On Chip
Technically, the disk-on-chip is an EEPROM, but appears to the CPU as, behaves as, and performs the same
functions in the system as an 8 mb disk drive, internally labeled as DOS drive C:\. It is used to store the
computer’s operating system files, the Teledyne Instruments firmware and peripheral files, and the operational
data generated by the calibrator’s internal data acquisition system.
9.2.2.2. Flash Chip
The flash chip is another, smaller EEPROM with about 64 kb of space, internally labeled as DOS drive B:\. The
M703E CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The M703E standard configuration is
one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to store the calibrator configuration as created during final
checkout at the factory. Separating these data onto a less frequently accessed chip significantly decreases the
chance of data corruption through drive failure.
In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the calibrator will continue to operate with just the DOC.
However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring the unit to be recalibrated.
05744 Rev B
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.2.3. RELAY PCA
The relay board is one of the central switching and power distribution units of the calibrator. It contains power
relays, valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as well as thermocouple amplifiers, power
distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the calibrator. The relay board communicates
with the motherboard over the I2C bus. Its status indicators and components can be used for troubleshooting
power problems and valve or heater functionality.
Generally, the relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the calibrator and is mounted vertically on the
backside of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power supplies, however the exact location of the relay
PCA may differ from model to model (see Figure 3-3.)
Watchdog
Status LED (D1)
DC Power Supply
Test Points
Status LED’s
(D2 through D16)
I2C Connector
Power
Connections
for DC
DC Valve &
Photometer
Pump
Heaters
Control
AC Pump
Configuration
Plug
DC
Valve Control
Drivers
AC Power
OUT to Dry
Air Pump
DC Valve &
Photometer
Pump Control
Connector
AC Power
IN
DC Power
Distribution
Connectors
Dry Air AC Pump
Control Relay
Figure 9-4:
Relay Board PCA with AC Relay Retainer Removed
This version of the Relay PCA include one AC relays that controls the AC-powered Dry Air (zero air) pump and
A plastic insulating safety shield covers the remaining empty AC Relay sockets.
CAUTION
NEVER REMOVE THIS SAFETY SHIELD WHILE THE INSTRUMENT IS PLUGGED IN AND
TURNED ON. THE CONTACTS OF THE AC RELAY SOCKETS BENEATH THE SHIELD
CARRY HIGH AC VOLTAGES EVEN WHEN NO RELAYS ARE PRESENT
140
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.2.3.1. Valve Control
The relay board also hosts two valve driver IC's, each of which can drive up four valves. In the M703E, the relay
PCA controls only those valves associated with the O3 generator and photometer options.
9.2.3.2. Heater Control
The relay PCA controls the DC heaters for the O3 generator and photometer lamp housing.
Figure 9-5:
Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.
9.2.3.3. Relay PCA Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry
Thirteen LEDs are located on the calibrator’s relay board to indicate the status of the calibrator’s heating zones
and some of its valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator. Table 11-2 shows the states of these
LEDs and their respective functionality.
D9 (Green) – Photometer Pump Status
D7 (Green) – Photometer Meas/Ref Valve
D6 (Green ) – Ext. Zero Air Valve
D15 (Yellow) - Photometer Lamp Heater
D16 (Yellow) – O3 Generator Lamp Heater
D1 (RED)
Watchdog
Indicator
Figure 9-6:
Status LED Locations – Relay PCA
05744 Rev B
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Table 9-1: Relay Board Status LEDs
LED
COLOR
Red
DESCRIPTION
Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus
operation.
FUNCTION
D1
Blinks when I2C bus is operating properly
D2
Yellow
Dry Air Pump Status
When lit the zero air AC pump is running.
D3-6
SPARE
When lit the valve open to REFERENCE
gas path
D7
D8
Green
Green
Photometer Meas/Ref Valve
SPARE
When lit the External Zero Air valve is
open
D9
Ext. Zero Air valve Status
D10 - 14
D15
SPARE
When lit the photometer UV lamp heater
is on
Yellow
Yellow
Photometer Heater Status
O3 Generator Lamp Heater
When lit the O3 generator UV lamp heater
is on
D16
9.2.3.4. Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator (D1)
The most important of the status LEDs on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watchdog LED. It is controlled
directly by the calibrator’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1.
Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds (indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped
functioning) this Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turns off all heaters and lamps.
142
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.2.4. MOTHERBOARD
This is the largest electronic assembly in the calibrator and is mounted to the rear panel as the base for the CPU
board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A/D
conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass
through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.
9.2.4.1. A to D Conversion
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the calibrator’s various sensors, are converted into digital
signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter (A/D).Under the control of
the CPU, this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital
word.
The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device (PLD), three
multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F converter produces a frequency
proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output of the V-F converter during a specified time period,
and sends the result of that count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the M703E it is used in uni-polar
mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows signals from -0.05V
to +5.05V to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter: Reference ground and
+4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the
CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute the converter’s offset and slope and also uses these factors for
subsequent conversions.
9.2.4.2. Sensor Inputs
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master multiplexer from two
connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ) on each of the inputs prevent cross talk
between the sensor signals.
9.2.4.3. Thermistor Interface
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-coefficient, thermistors
(temperature sensors) located inside the calibrator.
9.2.4.4. Analog Outputs
The M703E calibrator comes equipped with one analog output. It can be set by the user to carry the current
signal level of any one of the parameters (see Table 7-4) and will output an analog VDC signal that rises and
falls in relationship with the value of the parameter.
05744 Rev B
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.2.4.5. External Digital I/O
The external digital I/O performs two functions.
The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin connector on the rear
panel of the calibrator. These outputs convey on/off information about certain calibrator conditions such as
CONC VALID. They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices.
The CONTROL outputs can be used to initiate actions by external peripheral devices in conjunction with
individual steps of a calibration sequence (see Section 6.5.1.6).
The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source such as a PLC or data
logger (Section 6.5.1.5). Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.
9.2.4.6. I2C Data Bus
I2C is a two-wire, clocked, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic
systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The
data are then fed to the keyboard/display interface and finally onto the relay board.
Interface circuits on the keyboard/display interface and relay board convert the I2C data to parallel inputs and
outputs. An additional interrupt line from the keyboard to the motherboard allows the CPU to recognize and
service key strokes on the keyboard.
9.2.4.7. Power-up Circuit
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during calibrator start-up and sets the analog outputs, external digital
I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish
control.
144
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.2.5. POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER
The M703E calibrator operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC (both ± 10%)
between 47 and 63 Hz. A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or
incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the calibrator.
NOTE:
The M703E calibrator is equipped with a universal power supply that allows it to accept any AC power
configuration, within the limits specified in Table 2-2.
CAUTION
Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situation before
turning the calibrator back on.
SENSOR SUITES
KEY
Sensor Control
& I/O Logic
ANALOG SENSORS
AC POWER
DC POWER
O3 Generator
Reference detector,
LOGIC DEVICES
Pre-Amplifiers
& Amplifiers
Photometer UV
Detector
(e.g. CPU, I2C bus,
Keyboard, Display,
MotherBoard, etc.)
AC
POWER IN
PS 1
GAS
TEMPERATURE
SENSORS
+5 VDC
ON / OFF
SWITCH
±15 VDC
GAS
PRESSURE
SENSORS
RELAY PCA
AC
Relay
Photometer
UV Lamp P/S
PS 2
(+12 VDC)
Solenoid
Drivers
O3 Generator UV
Lamp Xfromer
O3 Generator UV
Lamp P/S
Cooling
Fan
DRY AIR
Pump
Photometer
Photometer
M/R valve
Pump
Controlled
via I2C
O3 Generator
UV Lamp
Figure 9-7:
M703E Power Distribution Block diagram
05744 Rev B
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.2.6. AC POWER CONFIGURATION
The E-Series digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes. As long as
instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30
seconds show a front panel display. Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and
CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied.
On the other hand, some of the calibrator’s the dry air pump must be properly configured for the type of power
being supplied to the instrument. Figure 2-3 shows the location of the Pump AC Configuration jumper.
JP7
Pump
Configuration
Figure 9-8:
Location of the AC Configuration Jumper for the Dry Air Pump
9.2.6.1. AC configuration – Internal Pump (JP7)
AC power configuration for the internal dry air pump is set using Jumper set JP7.
Table 9-2: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7)
JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS
LINE
POWER
LINE
FREQUENCY
JUMPER
COLOR
FUNCTION
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line
Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral
2 to 7
3 to 8
4 to 9
60 HZ
WHITE
BLACK
110VAC
115 VAC
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line
Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line
Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral
2 to 7
3 to 8
4 to 9
50 HZ1
Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together
Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line
Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together
1 to 6
3 to 8
1 to 6
3 to 8
60 HZ
BROWN
BLUE
220VAC
240 VAC
50 HZ1
Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line
1 A jumper between pins 5 and 10 may be present on the jumper plug assembly, but is only functional on the M300E and
has no function on the Models M700E or M703E.
146
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
110 VAC /115 VAC
220 VAC /240 VAC
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Present on 50 Hz version of jumper set,
and only functional for M300E
Figure 9-9:
Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)
9.3. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
LOCKING SCREW
FASTENER
FASTENER
MESSAGE FIELD
MODE FIELD
KEYBOARD
KEY DEFINITION FIELD
ON / OFF SWITCH
STATUS LED’s
Figure 9-10:
M703E Front Panel Layout
The most commonly used method for communicating with the M703E Photometric Calibrator is via the
instrument’s front panel, which includes a set of three status LEDs, a vacuum florescent display and a keyboard
with 8 context sensitive keys.
05744 Rev B
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.3.1.1. Calibrator Status LEDs
Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instruments basic operating status
Table 9-3: Front Panel Status LEDs
Name
Color
Behavior
Significance
Displays Warning
messages and Test
Function values
At initial start up the various warning messages will appear
here.
Main Message
Field
N/A
Displays
“STANDBY”
Mode Field
N/A
Instrument is in STANDBY mode.
STATUS LEDs
Unit is operating in STANDBY mode.
Active
Green
OFF
This LED glows green when the instrument is actively
producing calibration gas.
This LED only glows when the calibrator is performing an automatic
calibration sequence.
Auto
Fault
Yellow
Red
OFF
The calibrator is warming up and therefore many of its subsystems
are not yet operating within their optimum ranges. Various warning
messages will appear.
BLINKING
9.3.1.2. Keyboard
A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display (see Figure 9-10) is the main method by which the
user interacts with the calibrator. As the software is operated, labels appear on the bottom row of the display
directly above each active key, defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being
performed. Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the calibrator.
Note that the keys do not auto-repeat. In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two
consecutive operations, it must be released and re-pressed.
9.3.1.3. Display
The main display of the calibrator is a vacuum florescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each.
Information is organized in the following manner (see Figure 9-10):
MODE FIELD: Displays the name of the calibrator’s current operating mode.
MESSAGE FIELD: Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operation
data and response messages during interactive tasks.
KEY DEFINITION FIELD: Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display. These
definitions dynamic, context sensitive and software driven.
148
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.3.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics
I2C to Relay Board
Key Press
Detect
Display Data
Decoder
Display
Controller
Display Power
Watchdog
Keypad
Decoder
I2C Interface
Serial
Data
From 5 VDC
Power Supply
Optional
Maintenance
LED
Sample LED
(Green)
Maint.
Switch
2nd Lang.
Switch
Cal LED
(Yellow)
2 x 40 CHAR. VACUUM
FLUORESCENT DISPLAY
Fault LED
(Red)
KEYBOARD
FRONT PANEL
Beeper
Figure 9-11:
Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram
The keyboard/display interface electronics of the M703E Calibrator watches the status of the eight front panel
keys, alerts the CPU when keys are depressed, translates data from parallel to serial and back and manages
communications between the keyboard, the CPU and the front panel display. Except for the Keyboard interrupt
status bit, all communication between the CPU and the keyboard/display is handled by way of the instrument’s
I2C buss. The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus are allowed to
talk or required to listen. Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device the information
is intended.
KEYPAD DECODER
Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line. When a key is
depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal; latches and holds the state of
all eight lines (in effect creating an 8-bit data word); alerts the key-depress-detect circuit (a flip-flop IC);
translates the 8-bit word into serial data and; sends this to the I2C interface chip.
KEY-PRESS DETECT CIRCUIT
This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the I2C interface chip causing it to send an interrupt signal to the
CPU
I2C INTERFACE CHIP
This IC performs several functions:
Using a dedicated digital status bit, it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the
keyboard is ready to send.
Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data, the I2C interface chip
resets the key-depress-detect flip-flop.
In response to commands from the CPU, it turns the front panel status LEDs on and off and activates the
beeper.
Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or
closed (see Chapter 5 for information on these options).
05744 Rev B
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
DISPLAY DATA DECODER
This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU (in TTY format) into a bitmapped image that is sent over
a parallel data bus to the display.
DISPLAY CONTROLLER
This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself. It generates a
clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized. It can also, in response to commands from the CPU turn
off and/or reset the display.
DISPLAY POWER WATCHDOG
The M703E calibrator’s display can begin to show garbled information or lock-up if the DC voltage supplied to it
falls too low, even momentarily. To alleviate this, a brownout watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power
supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off, then
back on.
9.4. SOFTWARE OPERATION
The M703E calibrator’s core module is a high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a version of
DOS. On top of the DOS shell, special software developed by Teledyne Instruments interprets user commands
from various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s memory devices and
calculates the concentrations in the sample gas. Figure 9-11 shows a block diagram of this software
functionality.
DOS Shell
API FIRMWARE
Calibrator Operations
Memory Handling
Calibration Procedures
PC/104 BUS
Configuration Procedures
Calibration Data
System Status Data
Autonomic Systems
Diagnostic Routines
CALIBRATOR
HARDWARE
Interface Handling
Sensor input Data
Display Messages
Keypad
Measurement
Algorithms for
photometer
Analog Output Data
RS232 & RS485
External Digital I/O
PC/104 BUS
Figure 9-12:
Schematic of Basic Software Operation
150
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.5. O3 GENERATOR OPERATION
9.5.1. PRINCIPLE OF PHOTOLYTIC O3 GENERATION
Ozone is a naturally occurring substance that is sometimes called "activated oxygen". It contains three atoms of
oxygen (O3) instead of the usual two found in normal oxygen (O2) that is essential for life. Because of its
relatively short half-life, ozone cannot be bottled and stored for later use and there fore must always be
generated on-site by an ozone generator. The two main principles of ozone generation are UV-light and corona
discharge. While the corona-discharge method is most common because of its ability to generate very high
concentrations (up to 50%), it is inappropriate for calibration needs since the level of fine control over the O3
concentration is poor. Also, the corona discharge method produces a small amount of NO2 as a byproduct,
which also may be undesirable in a calibration application
The UV-light method is most feasible in calibration application where production of low, accurate concentrations
of ozone desired. This method mimics the radiation method that occurs naturally from the sun in the upper
atmosphere producing the ozone layer. An ultra-violet lamp inside the generator emits a precise wavelength of
UV Light (185 nm). Ambient air] is passed over an ultraviolet lamp, which splits some of the molecular oxygen
(O2) in the gas into individual oxygen atoms which attach to other existing oxygen molecules (O2), forming ozone
(O3).
Figure 9-13:
O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics
05744 Rev B
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.5.2. GENERATOR PNEUMATIC OPERATION
The rate of flow through the O3 generator is controlled by a flow control assembly located on the Regulator Sub-
Assembly in the front of the M703E.
O3 Generator
Gas Inlet
O3 Generator
Heater Control PCA
O3 Outlet to
Photometer
and
O3 Outlet
Internal Vent
Measure / Reference
Valve for
Photometer Bench
Figure 9-14:
O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations
9.5.3. O3 GENERATOR ELECTRONIC OPERATION
Electronically the O3 generator and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU via the
motherboard. Sensor signals, such as the UV lamp thermistor are routed to the motherboard, where they are
digitized. Digital data is sent by the motherboard to the calibrator’s CPU and where required stored in either
flash memory or on the CPU’s disk-on-chip. Commands from the CPU are sent to the motherboard and
forwarded to the various devices via the calibrator’s I2C bus.
152
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
Figure 9-15:
O3 Generator Electronic Block Diagram
UV Lamp
O3 Generator
Heater Control
PCA
UV Lamp Power
Supply
(200 VAC @ 30 kHz)
UV Lamp Power
Supply
Transformer
Reference Detector
Preamp Power
Connector
Reference
Detector
Signal Output
to Motherboard
UV Lamp
Power Connector
UV Lamp
I2C Connector
O3 Generator
Reference Detector
O3 Generator
Reference Detector
PCA
Figure 9-16:
O3 Generator Electronic Components Location
05744 Rev B
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.5.3.1. O3 Generator Temperature Control
In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M703E’s O3 generator is maintained at a constant
48ºC. if the lamp temperature falls below 43ºC or rises above 53ºC a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU.
This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA (see Section 9.2.3.2). The location
of the thermistor and heater associated with the O3 generator is shown below:
UV Lamp
O3 Generator
Heater Control PCA
(Heater is located beneath
the PCA)
UV Lamp
Thermistor
Figure 9-17:
O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations
154
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.6. PHOTOMETER OPERATION
The Model M703E calibrator’s optional photometer determines the concentration of Ozone (O3) in a sample gas
drawn through it. Sample and calibration gasses must be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to
establish a stable gas flow through the absorption tube where the gas’ ability to absorb ultraviolet (UV) radiation
of a certain wavelength (in this case 254 nm) is measured.
Gas bearing O3 and zero air are alternately routed through the photometer’s absorption tube. Measurements of
the UV light passing through the sample gas with and without O3 present are made and recorded.
Calibration of the photometer is performed in software and does not require physical adjustments. Two internal
variables, a slope and offset are used to adjust the calibration of the photometer.
The CPU uses these calibration values, the UV absorption measurements made on the sample gas in the
absorption tube along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final O3
concentration.
9.6.1. MEASUREMENT METHOD
9.6.1.1. Calculating O3 Concentration
The basic principle by which photometer works is called Beer’s Law (also referred to as the Beer-Lambert
equation). It defines the how light of a specific wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a
certain distance at a given temperature and pressure. The mathematical relationship between these three
parameters for gasses at Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP) is:
Equation 9-5
I = I0 e-αLC
at STP
Where:
Io
I
is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption.
is the intensity with absorption.
L
C
Α
is the absorption path, or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed.
is the concentration of the absorbing gas. In the case of the Model 703E, Ozone (O3).
is the absorption coefficient that tells how well O3 absorbs light at the specific wavelength of interest.
To solve this equation for C, the concentration of the absorbing Gas (in this case O3), the application of a little
algebra is required to rearrange the equation as follows:
Equation 9-6
Io
I
1
C = ln
×
at STP
α L
Unfortunately, both ambient temperature and pressure influence the density of the sample gas and therefore the
number of ozone molecules present in the absorption tube thus changing the amount of light absorbed.
05744 Rev B
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
In order to account for this effect the following addition is made to the equation:
Equation 9-7
Io
I
1
Τ
29.92inHg
C = ln
×
×
×
273oΚ
α L
Ρ
Where:
T
P
= sample ambient temperature in degrees Kelvin
= ambient pressure in inches of mercury
Finally, to convert the result into Parts per Billion (PPB), the following change is made:
Equation 9-8
9
Io
I
10
Τ
29.92inHg
C = ln
×
×
×
273o Κ
α L
Ρ
In a nutshell the M703E photometer:
Measures each of the above variables: ambient temperature; ambient gas pressure; the intensity of the
UV light beam with and without O3 present;
Inserts know values for the length of the absorption path and the absorption coefficient, and:
Calculates the concentration of O3 present in the sample gas.
9.6.1.2. The Measurement / Reference Cycle
In order to solve the Beer-Lambert equation it is necessary to know the intensity of the light passing through the
absorption path both when O3 is present and when it is not. A valve called the measure/reference valve,
physically located on front-left corner of the O3 generator assembly (see Figures 3-4 and 9-14) alternates the
gas stream flowing to the photometer between zero air (diluent gas) and the O3 output from the O3 generator.
This cycle takes about 6 seconds.
Table 9-4: M703E Photometer Measurement / Reference Cycle
TIME INDEX
0 sec.
STATUS
Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Measure Path.
0 – 2 sec.
Wait Period. Ensures that the Absorption tube has been adequately flushed of any
previously present gasses.
2 – 3 Seconds
Analyzer measures the average UV light intensity of O3 bearing Sample Gas (I) during
this period.
3 sec.
Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Reference Path.
3 – 5 sec.
Wait Period. Ensures that the Absorption tube has been adequately flushed of O3
bearing gas.
5 – 6 Seconds
Analyzer measures the average UV light intensity of Non-O3 bearing Sample Gas (I0)
during this period.
CYCLE REPEAT EVERY 6 SECONDS
156
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
M703E Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH
yel
blk
DRY AIR
IN
O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
Filter
PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR
On Back Panel
Pressure
Regulator
blu
pur
PHOTOMETER
INLET
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA
pur
grn
REF/MEAS
Valve
Flow Control
(800 cm3/min)
blk
yel
grn
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
orn
red
EXHAUST
PUMP
red
PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT
INTERNAL
VENT
PUMP
orn
PHOTOMETER
OUTLET
orn
orn
TO ANALYZER
blu
ZERO AIR
IN
TO ANALYZER
VENT
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Figure 9-18:
O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle
M703E Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH
yel
blk
O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
DRY AIR
IN
On Back Panel
Filter
PHOTOMETER
PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR
Pressure
Regulator
INLET
pur
blu
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA
REF/MEAS pur
Valve
yel
blk
Flow Control
(800 cm3/min)
grn
grn
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
orn
EXHAUST
PUMP
red
PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT
INTERNAL
VENT
PUMP
orn
PHOTOMETER
OUTLET
orn
orn
TO ANALYZER
blu
ZERO AIR
IN
TO ANALYZER
VENT
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Figure 9-19:
O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Reference Cycle
05744 Rev B
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.6.1.3. The Absorption Path
In the most basic terms, the M703E photometer uses a high energy, mercury vapor lamp to generate a beam of
UV light. This beam passes through a window of material specifically chosen to be both non-reactive to O3 and
transparent to UV radiation at 254nm and into an absorption tube filled with sample gas.
Because ozone is a very efficient absorber of UV radiation the absorption path length required to create a
measurable decrease in UV intensity is short enough (approximately 42 cm) that the light beam is only required
to make one pass through the Absorption Tube. Therefore, no complex mirror system is needed to lengthen the
effective path by bouncing the beam back and forth.
Finally, the UV passes through a similar window at the other end of the absorption tube and is detected by a
specially designed vacuum diode that only detects radiation at or very near a wavelength of 254nm. The
specificity of the detector is high enough that no extra optical filtering of the UV light is needed.
The detector reacts to the UV light and outputs a current signal that varies in direct relationship with the intensity
of the light shining on it. This current signal is amplified and converted to a 0 to 5 VDC voltage analog signal
voltage sent to the instrument’s motherboard where it is digitized. The CPU to be uses this digital data in
computing the concentration of O3 in the absorption tube.
Window
Window
UV Detector
ABSORPTION TUBE
Analog current
signal is output by
Detector
Sample Gas IN
Sample Gas OUT
UV
Source
Absorption Path Length = 42 cm
O-5 VDC
analog signal
Photometer
Pre amp
PCA
to
Motherboard
Figure 9-20:
O3 Photometer Absorption Path
9.6.1.4. Interferent Rejection
It should be noted that the UV absorption method for detecting ozone is subject to interference from a number of
sources. The has M703E’s photometer been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from sulfur
dioxide, nitrogen dioxide, nitric oxide, water, and meta-xylene.
While the photometer rejects interference from the aromatic hydrocarbon meta-xylene, it should be noted that
there are a very large number of other volatile aromatic hydrocarbons that could potentially interfere with ozone
detection. If the M703E calibrator is installed in an environment where high aromatic hydrocarbon
concentrations are suspected, specific tests should be conducted to reveal the amount of interference these
compounds may be causing.
158
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.6.2. PHOTOMETER LAYOUT
The Photometer is where the absorption of UV light by ozone is measured and converted into a voltage. It
consists of several sub-assemblies:
A mercury-vapor UV lamp. This lamp is coated in a material that optically screens the UV radiation
output to remove the O3 producing 185nm radiation. Only light at 254nm is emitted.
An AC power supply that supplies the current for starting and maintaining the plasma arc of the mercury
vapor lamp.
A thermistor and DC heater attached to the UV Lamp to maintain the Lamp at an optimum operating
temperature.
42 cm long quartz absorption tube.
A thermistor attached to the quartz tube for measuring sample gas temperature.
Gas inlet and outlet mounting blocks that rout sample gas into and out of the photometer.
The vacuum diode, UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current.
A preamplifier assembly, which convert the Detector’s current output into a DC Voltage then amplifies it
to a level readable by the A to D converter circuitry of the instrument’s motherboard
Sample Gas
Thermistor
UV Lamp Thermistor
(UV Lamp Heater Behind Thermistor)
UV Lamp Power
Transformer
Absorption Tube
UV Detector
Power Connector
from
+15 VDC power supply
Sample Gas
Outlet
UV Detector
Preamp PCA
Sample Gas Inlet
UV Lamp Power
UV Lamp Heater
Control PCA
Supply
(200 VAC @ 30 kHz)
UV Lamp
Figure 9-21:
O3 Photometer Layout – Top Cover Removed
9.6.3. PHOTOMETER PNEUMATIC OPERATION
The flow of gas through the photometer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air though the instrument.
There are several advantages to this “pull through” configuration. Placing the pump down stream from the
absorption tube avoids problems caused by the pumping process heating and compressing the sample.
In order to measure accurately the presences of low concentrations of O3 in the sample air it is necessary to
establish and maintain a relatively constant and stable volumetric flow of sample gas through the photometer.
The simplest way to accomplish this is by placing a flow control assembly containing a critical flow orifice directly
upstream of the pump but down stream from the absorption tube.
The critical flow orifice installed in the pump supply line is tuned to create a gas flow of 800 cm3/min. A pressure
sensor and a flow sensor, located on the O3 generator / photometer pressure flow sensor PCA, monitor the
pressure and flow rate of the gas passing through the photometers absorption tube.
See Figures 9-18 and 9-19 for depictions of the gas flow related to the photometer.
05744 Rev B
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
9.6.4. PHOTOMETER ELECTRONIC OPERATION
PC 104
CPU Card
MOTHER BOARD
A/D
Converter
s
4 Bu
PC 10
Disk on
Chip
Flash
Chip
I2C Bus
Photometer
Sample Gas
Pressure
Sensor
Thermistor Interface
RELAY PCA
Photometer M/R
Valve
(Located on 0#
Generator Assembly)
I2C
Status
LED
y
Photometer
Detector
Preamp
Photometer
UV Lamp
Temperature
Photometer
Sample Gas
Temperature
Absorption tube
Photometer
Lamp Power
Supply
Photometer
Pump
Photometer
Detector
Photometer
Lamp Heater
Photometer
Figure 9-22:
O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram
Like the O3 generator, the O3 photometer and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated by the CPU
via the motherboard. Communications to and from the CPU are handled by the motherboard.
Outgoing commands for the various devices such as the photometer pump, the UV lamp power supply the U\V
Lamp heater are issued via the I2C bus to circuitry on the relay PCA which turns them ON/OFF. The CPU also
issues commands over the I2C bus that cause the relay PCA to cycle the measure/reference valve back and
forth.
Incoming date the UV light detector is amplified locally then converted to digital information by the motherboard.
Output from the photometers temperature sensors is also amplified and converted to digital data by the
motherboard. The O3 concentration of the sample gas is computed by the CPU using this data (along with gas
pressure and flow data received from the M703E’s pressure sensors.
9.6.4.1. O3 Photometer Temperature Control
In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the M703E’s O3 photometer is maintained at a constant
58ºC. This is intentionally set at a temperature higher than the ambient temperature of the M703E’s operating
environment to make sure that local changes in temperature do not affect the UV Lamp. If the lamp temperature
falls below 56ºC or rises above 61ºC a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU.
This temperature is controlled as described in the section on the relay PCA (Section 9.3.3.2).
The following TEST functions report these temperatures and are viewable from the instrument’s front panel:
PHOTO LAMP TEMP - The temperature of the UV Lamp reported in ºC.
PHOTO STEMP - The temperature of the Sample gas in the absorption tube reported in ºC.
160
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Theory of Operation
9.6.4.2. Pneumatic Sensors for the O3 Photometer
The several sensors located on the pneumatic sensor just to the left rear of the O3 generator assembly measure
the absolute pressure and the flow rate of gas inside the photometer’s absorption tube. This information is used
by the CPU to calculate the O3 concentration of the sample gas (See Equation 9-7). Both of these
measurements are made downstream from the absorption tube but upstream of the pump. A critical flow orifice
located between the flow sensor and the pump maintains the gas flow through the photometer at 800 cm3/min.
The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument’s front panel:
PHOTO FLOW - The flow rate of gas through the photometer measured in LPM.
PHOTO SPRESS – the pressure of the gas inside the absorption tube. This pressure is reported in
inches of mercury-absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e. referenced to a vacuum (zero absolute pressure). This is not
the same as PSIG.
USER NOTES:
05744 Rev B
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Theory of Operation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
162
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
10. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
Predictive diagnostic functions including failure warnings and alarms built into the calibrator’s firmware allow the
user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing painstaking preventative maintenance
procedures.
For the most part, the M703E calibrator is maintenance free, there are, however, a minimal number of simple
procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the M703E photometer continues to operate
accurately and reliably over its the lifetime.
Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 11 of this manual.
10.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 10-1 below shows the recommended maintenance schedule for the M703E. Please note that in certain
environments (i.e. dusty, very high ambient pollutant levels) some maintenance procedures may need to be
performed more often than shown.
NOTE
A Span and Zero Calibration Check (see CAL CHECK REQ’D Column of Table 10-1) must be performed
following certain of the maintenance procedure listed below.
See Section 8.1 for instructions on performing a calibration check.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING ANY OF
THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS THAT REQUIRE ENTRY INTO THE INTERIOR OF THE
ANALYZER.
NOTE
THE OPERATIONS OUTLINED IN THIS CHAPTER ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY
QUALIFIED MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL ONLY.
05744 Rev B
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
M703E Photometric O3 Calibrator Operators Manual
USER NOTES:
164
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
10.2. PERFORMING LEAK CHECKS
Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; Section Error! Reference source not found.
presents a simple leak check procedure. Section 10.2.1 describes a more thorough procedure.
10.2.1. PRESSURE LEAK CHECK
- BEGINNING OF INSERTION: Replace original section below with this section, per Mike Troy:
Obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne Instruments’ part number 01960, which contains a small pump,
shut-off valve and pressure gauge. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the two-stage regulator
adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used.
CAUTION
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not apply a vacuum as this will
cause soap solution to be drawn into the instrument, contaminating it.
DO NOT EXCEED 15 PSI PRESSURE.
1. Turn OFF power to the calibrator.
2. Remove the instrument cover
3. Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the “dry air in” port at the rear panel.
4. Install caps on the following fittings on the rear panel.
Exhaust
Vent
Internal Vent
Zero
Air Inlet
Both CALGAS OUT fittings
NOTE
The M703E calibrator cannot be leak checked with the pump in line due to internal leakage that normally
occurs in the pump.
5. Locate the dry air pump.
6. Disconnect the two fittings on the dry air pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.
7. Locate the photometer pump.
8. Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.
9. Pressurize the calibrator with the leak checker, allowing enough time to pressurize the instrument fully.
10. Check each fitting with soap bubble solution, looking for bubbles.
05744 Rev B
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution.
Do not re-apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it.
Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.
11. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate should be < 1 in-Hg (0.4 psi) in 5
minutes after the pressure is shut off.
M703E Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH
yel
blk
DRY AIR
IN
O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
Filter
PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR
On Back Panel
Pressure
Regulator
blu
PHOTOMETER
INLET
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA
pur
REF/MEAS
Valve
pur
grn
blk
yel
Flow Control
(800 cm3/min)
grn
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
orn
red
EXHAUST
PUMP
red
PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT
INTERNAL
VENT
orn
PHOTOMETER
OUTLET
orn
orn
TO ANALYZER
TO ANALYZER
VENT
PUMP
blu
ZERO AIR
IN
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Figure 10-1:
Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks
-END OF INSERTION
168
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
If you cannot locate the leak by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne Instruments’
part number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve and pressure gauge. Alternatively, a tank of
pressurized gas, with the two-stage regulator adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be
used.
CAUTION
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not apply / re-apply vacuum as
this will cause soap solution to be drawn into the instrument, contaminating it.
DO NOT EXCEED 15 PSI PRESSURE.
1. Turn OFF power to the instrument.
2. Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel.
3. Install caps on the following fittings on the rear panel.
Exhaust
Vent
Internal Vent
Zero
Air Inlet
Both CALGAS OUT fittings
05744 Rev B
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
NOTE
The M703E calibrator cannot be leak checked with the pump in line due to internal leakage that normally
occurs in the pump.
1. Remove the instrument cover
2. Locate the photometer pump.
3. Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.
4. Locate the dry air pump.
5. Disconnect the two fittings on the dry air pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.
6. Locate the photometer pump.
7. Disconnect the two fittings on the photometer pump and install a union fitting in place of the pump.
8. Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker, allowing enough time to pressurize the instrument fully.
9. Check each fitting with soap bubble solution, looking for bubbles.
Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution.
Do not re-apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it.
Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.
10. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate should be < 1 in-Hg (0.4 psi) in 5
minutes after the pressure is shut off.
M703E Chassis
PHOTOMETER BENCH
yel
blk
DRY AIR
IN
O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
Filter
PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR
On Back Panel
Pressure
Regulator
blu
PHOTOMETER
INLET
O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA
pur
REF/MEAS
Valve
pur
grn
blk
yel
Flow Control
(800 cm3/min)
grn
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
orn
red
EXHAUST
PUMP
red
PHOTOMETER
ZERO OUT
INTERNAL
VENT
orn
PHOTOMETER
OUTLET
orn
orn
TO ANALYZER
TO ANALYZER
VENT
PUMP
blu
ZERO AIR
IN
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Figure 10-2:
Pneumatic setup for performing Pressure Leak Checks
170
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
10.3. CLEANING OR REPLACING THE ABSORPTION TUBE
NOTE:
Although this procedure should never be needed as long as the user is careful only to supply the
photometer with clean, dry and particulate free zero air, it is included here for those rare occasions
when cleaning or replacing the absorption tube may be required.
1. Remove the center cover from the optical bench.
2. Unclip the sample thermistor from the tube.
3. Loosen the two screws on the round tube retainers at either end of the tube.
4. Using both hands, carefully rotate the tube to free it.
5. Slide the tube towards the lamp housing.
The front of the tube can now be slid past the detector block and out of the instrument.
CAUTION
DO NOT CAUSE THE TUBE TO BIND AGAINST THE METAL HOUSINGS.
THE TUBE MAY BREAK AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.
6. Clean the tube with Distilled or de-ionized water by running a swab from end-to-end.
7. Air-dry the tube.
8. Check the cleaning job by looking down the bore of the tube.
It should be free from dirt and lint.
9. Inspect the o-rings that seal the ends of the optical tube (these o-rings may stay seated in the manifolds
when the tube is removed.)
If there is any noticeable damage to these o-rings, they should be replaced.
10. Re-assemble the tube into the lamp housing and perform an AUTO LEAK CHECK on the instrument.
NOTE:
It is important for proper optical alignment that the tube be pushed all the way towards the front of the
optical bench when it is re-assembled.
This will ensure that the tube is assembled with the forward end against the stop inside the detector
manifold.
10.4. REBUILDING THE DRY AIR PUMP
The diaphragm in the sample pump will periodically wear out and require replacement. A sample rebuild kit is
available. See Appendix B of this manual for the part number of the pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams
are included with the kit.
Always perform a Flow and Leak Check after rebuilding the Sample Pump.
05744 Rev B
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
10.5. PHOTOMETER UV SOURCE LAMP ADJUSTMENT
This procedure details the steps for adjustment of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly. This
procedure should be done whenever the PHOTO REFERENCE test function value drops below 3000 mV.
1. Make sure the analyzer is warmed-up and has been running for at least 15 minutes before proceeding.
2. Remove the cover from the analyzer.
3. Locate the optional Photometer (see Figure 3-3)
4. Locate the UV DETECTOR GAIN ADJUST POT on the photometer assembly (see Figure 10-3).
5. Perform the following procedure:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
Make sure that the M703E
is in standby mode.
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to enter
the correct PASSWORD
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
DIAG I/O
1) CONTROL_IN_2=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP
PRNT EXIT
DIAG I/O
JUMP TO:1
1
7
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these keys to show
the ID number for the
desired signal
(see Appendix A)
DIAG
17) PHOTO_DET = 3342.2 MV
PRNT EXIT
PREV NEXT
Additional adjustment can be made by physically
rotating the lamp in it’s housing.
To do this, slightly loosen the UV lamp
setscrew.
Using an insulated pot adjustment tool, Turn the UV
DETECTOR GAIN ADJUSTMENT POT until the value of
PHOTO_DET is as close as possible to 4600.0 MV.
Next, slowly rotate the lamp up to ¼ turn in
either direction while watching the
PHOTO_DET signal.
Once the optimum lamp position is
determined, re-tighten the lamp
setscrew
If a minimum reading of 3500.0 mV can not be reached,
the lamp must be replaced.
6. Replace the cover on the analyzer.
172
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
Figure 10-3: Photometer – Location of UV Detector Gain Adjustment & UV Lamp Set Screw
10.6. PHOTOMETER UV SOURCE LAMP REPLACEMENT
This procedure details the steps for replacement of the UV source lamp in the optical bench assembly. This
procedure should be done whenever the lamp can no longer be adjusted as described in Section 10.2.3.
1. Turn the analyzer off.
2. Remove the cover from the analyzer.
3. Locate the Optical Bench Assembly (see Figure 3-3)
4. Locate the UV lamp at the rear of the optical bench assembly (see Figure 10-3)
5. Unplug the lamp cable from the power supply connector on the side of the optical bench.
6. Slightly loosen (do not remove) the UV lamp setscrew and pull the lamp from its housing.
7. Install the new lamp in the housing, pushing it all the way in. Leave the UV lamp setscrew loose for
now.
8. Turn the analyzer back on and allow it to warm up for at least 15 minutes.
9. Turn the UV detector gain adjustment pot (See Figure 10-3) clockwise to its minimum value. The pot
should click softly when the limit is reached.
10. Perform the UV Lamp Adjustment procedure described in Section 10.5, with the following exceptions:
Slowly rotate the lamp in its housing (up to ¼ turn in either direction) until a MAXIMUM value (or 4600
mVDC) is observed.
Make sure the lamp is pushed all the way into the housing while performing this rotation.
If the PHOTO_DET will not drop below 5000 mV while performing this rotation, contact T-API
Customer Service for assistance.
Once a lamp position is found that corresponds to a maximum observed value for PHOTO_DET, tighten
the lamp setscrew at the approximate maximum value observed.
If the value of PHOTO_DET is not within the range of 4400 – 4600 mV, adjust it accordingly.
11. Replace the cover on the analyzer.
NOTE
The UV lamp contains mercury (Hg), which is considered hazardous waste. The lamp should be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations regarding waste containing mercury.
05744 Rev B
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
10.7. ADJUSTMENT OR REPLACEMENT OF OZONE
GENERATOR UV LAMP
This procedure details the steps for replacement and initial adjustment of the ozone generator lamp. If you are
adjusting an existing lamp, skip to Step 8.
1. Turn off the analyzer.
2. Remove the cover from the analyzer.
UV Lamp
Set Screws
Lamp
O-ring
O3 Generator
Body
Figure 10-4:
O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations
4. Remove the two setscrews on the top of the O3 generator and gently pull out the old lamp.
5. Inspect the o-ring beneath the nut and replace if damaged.
6. Install the new lamp in O3 generator housing.
Do not fully tighten the setscrews.
The lamp should be able to be rotated in the assembly by grasping the lamp cable.
7. Turn on analyzer and allow it to stabilize for at least 20 minutes.
8. Locate the O3 generator reference detector adjustment potentiometer.
O3 Generator
Body
Adjustment
Pot
O3
Generator
Reference
Detector
PCA
Figure 10-5:
Location of O3 Generator Reference Detector Adjustment Pot
174
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
9. Perform the following procedure:
10. Tighten the two set -screws.
11. Replace the calibrator’s cover
12. Perform an auto-leak check (See Section 10.2.1).
13. Calibrate the Ozone Generator calibration (see Section 8.2 Calibrating the O3 Generator ??)
05744 Rev B
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Maintenance Schedule & Procedures
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
USER NOTES:
176
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR OF
THE M703E CALIBRATOR
This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the calibrator.
NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified maintenance
personnel only.
CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with the
instrument open and running.
Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical
damage to the calibrator.
Do not drop tools into the calibrator or leave those after your procedures.
Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while
operating inside the calibrator.
Use common sense when operating inside a running calibrator.
11.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
The M703E Photometric Calibrator has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and
repaired. During operation, it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key
operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps:
14. Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.
15. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note any major
deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.
16. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic communication channels are
operating properly.
Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the
relay PCA.
Note that the calibrator’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match the color of the
corresponding test points on the relay PCA.
17. Suspect a leak first!
Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the
internal pneumatics of the calibrator or the diluent gas and source gases delivery systems.
Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas lines, damaged seals,
punctured gas lines, a damaged / malfunctioning pumps, etc.
05744 Rev B
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
18. Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.4.4 to confirm that the calibrator’s vital functions are working
(power supplies, CPU, relay PCA, keyboard, PMT cooler, etc.).
See Figure 3-3 for general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the calibrator.
See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D.
11.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the
front panel. Table 11-1 lists warning messages, along with their meaning and recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that more than two or three warning messages occurring at the same time is often an
indication that some fundamental sub-system (power supply, relay PCA, motherboard) has failed rather than an
indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings. In this case, it is recommended that proper
operation of power supplies (See Section 11.4.3), the relay PCA (See Section 11.4.6), and the motherboard
(See Section11.4.8) be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages.
The M703E will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by displaying the keypad label MSG on the Front
Panel. In this case, the Front panel display will look something like the following:
STANDBY
TEST
LAMP DRIVER WARNING
STBY MSG CLR SETUP
GEN
The calibrator will also alert the user via the Serial I/O COM port(s) and cause the FAULT LED on the front panel
to blink.
To view or clear the various warning messages press:
STANDBY
TEST
SYSTEM RESET
Suppresses the
warning messages
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP
STANDBY
SYSTEM RESET
MSG returns the active
warnings to the message
field.
TEST
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP
STANDBY
SYSTEM RESET
Press CLR to clear the current
TEST
GEN STBY SEQ MSG CLR SETUP
message.
If more than one warning is
active, the next message will take
its place.
SYSTEM
TEST
ANALOG CAL WARNING
CLR SETUP
Once the last warning has
been cleared, the MESSAGE
FIELD will return to displaying
the currently selected TEST
FUNCTION and value.
NOTE:
If a warning message persists after
several attempts to clear it, the message
may indicate a real problem and not an
artifact of the warm-up period
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
178
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
Table 11-1: Front Panel Warning Messages
WARNING
FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES
Configuration and
Calibration data reset to
original Factory state.
- Failed Disk on Chip
- User has erased configuration data
CONFIG INITIALIZED
- Failed Disk-on-Chip.
- User cleared data.
Data Storage in iDAS was
erased.
DATA INITIALIZED
- WARNING only appears on Serial I/O COM Port(s)
- Front Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not
The CPU is unable to
Communicate with the
Front Panel Display
Keyboard
respond.
FRONT PANEL WARN
- Failed Keyboard
- I2C Bus failure
- Loose Connector/Wiring
- I2C has failed
The CPU is unable to
communicate with either
the O3 generator or
photometer lamp I2C driver
chip.
LAMP DRIVER WARN
- No IZS option installed, instrument improperly configured
- O3 generator heater
- O3 generator temperature sensor
- Relay controlling the O3 generator heater
- Entire Relay PCA
IZS Ozone Generator
Temp is outside of control
range of 48C 3C.
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP
WARNING
- I2C Bus
Possible failure of:
- O3 generator UV Lamp
The O3 generator’s
reference detector output
has dropped below 50 mV.1
O3 GEN REFERENCE
WARNING1
- O3 generator reference detector
- O3 generator lamp power supply
- I2C bus
The photometer pump
failed to turn on within the
specified timeout period
(default = 30 sec.).
- Failed Pump
- Problem with Relay PCA
- 12 VDC power supply problem
O3 PUMP WARNING1
Possible failure of:
- Bench lamp heater
- Bench lamp temperature sensor
- Relay controlling the bench heater
- Entire Relay PCA
The photometer lamp temp
PHOTO LAMP TEMP
WARNING
is < 51C or >61C.
- I2C Bus
- Hot” Lamp
Value output during the
Photometer’s reference
cycle changes from
measurements to
measurement more than
25% of the time.
- Faulty UV source lamp
- Noisy UV detector
- Faulty UV lamp power supply
- Faulty ± 15 VDC power supply
PHOTO LAMP STABILITY
WARNING
Possible failure of:
- UV Lamp
- UV Photo-Detector Preamp
Occurs when Ref is
<2500 mVDC
or >4950 mVDC.
PHOTO REFERENCE
WARNING
Mother Board not detected
on power up.
- THIS WARNING only appears on Serial I/O COM Port(s)
Front Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not
respond.
REAR BOARD NOT DET
- Failure of Mother Board
(table continued)
05744 Rev B
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
Table 11-1:
Front Panel Warning Messages (cont.)
WARNING
FAULT CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
- I2C Bus failure
The CPU cannot
communicate with the
Relay PCA.
RELAY BOARD WARN
- Failed relay PCA
- Loose connectors/wiring
The computer has
rebooted.
- This message occurs at power on.
- If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted:
- Failed +5 VDC power
SYSTEM RESET
- Fatal error caused software to restart
- Loose connector/wiring
11.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the test functions viewable from the calibrators front panel
can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of
the calibrators Theory of Operation (see Chapter 9).
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column of the calibrator Final
Test and Validation Data Sheet shipped with the instrument. Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a
failure of one or more of the calibrator’s subsystems. Functions whose values are still within the acceptable
range but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also
indicate a failure.
A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these Test Functions.
Table 11-2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range.
Table 11-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures
TEST FUNCTION
DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE WARNING from Table
11-1
O3 GEN REF1
Gas flow problems directly affect the concentration accuracy of the M703E’s O3 calibration
gases. This number is computed using data from the calibrator’s
OUTPUT FLOW
O3 GEN DRIVE
- Check for Gas Flow problems.
- Check the pressure regulator
Check the O3 generator heater and temperature sensors
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11-1
Incorrect Lamp temperature can affect the efficiency and durability of the O3 generators UV
lamp.
O3 LAMP TEMP
REG PRESSURE
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table
11-1
Same as REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING from Table 11-1
If the Box Temperature is out of range, make sure that the:
Box Temperature typically runs ~7C warmer than ambient temperature.
- The Exhaust-Fan is running
BOX TEMP
- The there is sufficient open space to the side and rear of instrument to allow adequate
ventilation.
(table continued)
180
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
Table 11-2:
Test Functions - Indicated Failures
TEST FUNCTION
DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.
If the value displayed is too high the UV Source has become brighter. Adjust the variable
gain potentiometer on the UV Preamp Board in the optical bench.
If the value displayed is too low:
- < 100mV – Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply.
- < 2000mV – Lamp output has dropped, adjust UV Preamp Board or replace lamp.
PHOTO MEASURE
&
If the value displayed is constantly changing:
- Bad UV lamp.
PHOTO REFERENCE
- Defective UV lamp power supply.
- Failed I2C Bus.
If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than 10mV between zero and
span gas:
- Defective/leaking switching valve.
Gas flow problems directly affect the accuracy of the photometer measurements and
therefore the concentration accuracy of cal gas mixtures involving O3 and GPT mixtures.
PHOTO FLOW
- Check for Gas Flow problems.
Poor photometer temp control can cause instrument noise, stability and drift. Temperatures
outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern.
PHOTO LAMP TEMP
Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11-1
The pressure of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the
concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample pressure can cause inaccurate
readings.
PHOTO SPRESS
- Check for Gas Flow problems. See Section Table 11-1.
The temperature of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the
concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample temperature can cause inaccurate
readings.
Possible causes of faults are:
- Bad bench lamp heater
PHOTO STEMP
- Failed sample temperature sensor
- Failed relay controlling the bench heater
- Failed Relay PCA
- I2C Bus malfunction
- Hot Lamp
Values outside range indicate:
Contamination of the Zero Air or Span Gas supply.
Instrument is miss-calibrated.
Blocked Gas Flow.
PHOTO SLOPE
Faulty Sample Pressure Sensor or circuitry.
Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration.
Values outside range indicate:
Contamination of the Zero Air supply.
Time of Day clock is too fast or slow.
To adjust see Section 6.7.2.
Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead.
PHOTO OFFSET
TIME
05744 Rev B
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION
The Signal I/O parameters found under the DIAG Menu combined with a thorough understanding of the
instruments Theory of Operation (found in Chapter 9) are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:
The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the calibrator’s critical inputs and outputs.
Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be
manually exercised.
The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals.
This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these signals on the
operation of the calibrator. Figure 11-1 is an example of how to use the Signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage
of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will vary
depending on the situation.
Figure 11-1:
Example of Signal I/O Function
182
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.2. USING THE ANALOG OUTPUT TEST CHANNEL
The signals available for output over the M703E’s analog output channel can also be used as diagnostic tools.
See Section 6.9 for instruction on activating the analog output and selecting a function.
Table 11-3: Test Channel Outputs as Diagnostic Tools
TEST
CHANNEL
FULL
SCALE
CAUSES OF EXTREMELY
HIGH / LOW READINGS
DESCRIPTION
ZERO
NONE
TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF
If the value displayed is:
-
>5000 mV: The UV source has become brighter. Adjust the
UV Detector Gain potentiometer.
The raw output of the
photometer during its
measure cycle
-
-
< 100mV – Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply.
O3 PHOTO
MEAS
0 mV
5000 mV*
< 2000mV – Lamp output has dropped, adjust UV Preamp
Board or replace lamp.
If the value displayed is constantly changing:
-
-
-
Bad UV lamp.
Defective UV lamp power supply.
Failed I2C Bus.
The raw output of the
photometer during its
reference cycle
O3 PHOTO
REF
0 mV
5000 mV
If the PHOTO REFERENCE value changes by more than
10mV between zero and span gas:
-
Defective/leaking M/R switching valve.
The raw output of the
O3 generator’s
reference detector
O3 GEN
REF
Possible causes of faults are the same as OUTPUT FLOW from
Table 11-2.
0 mV
5000 mV
Output flow rate
(computed from
regulator pressure).
OUTPUT
FLOW
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN REFERENCE
WARNING from Table 11-1
0 LPM
6.000 LPM
The pressure of gas in
the photometer
absorption tube
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
0 "Hg
0 cm3/min
0 C
40 "Hg-In-A
1000 cc/m
70 C
Check for Gas Flow problems.
Check for Gas Flow problems.
SAMPLE
FLOW
The gas flow rate
through the photometer
The temperature of gas
in the photometer
absorption tube
SAMPLE
TEMP
Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO STEMP from
Table 11-2
Possible failure of:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bench lamp heater
Bench lamp temperature sensor
Relay controlling the bench heater
Entire Relay PCA
PHOTO
LAMP
TEMP
The temperature of the
photometer UV lamp
0 C
70 C
I2C Bus
Hot” Lamp
The temperature of the
O3 generator’s UV
lamp
O3 LAMP
TEMP
0 mV
5000 mV
Same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 11-1
The temperature inside
the M703E’s chassis
(same as BOX TEMP)
CHASSIS
TEMP
Possible causes of faults are the same as BOX TEMP from Table
11-2
0 C
70 C
-
-
-
-
I2C Bus malfunction
Gas flow problem through the photometer.
Electronic failure of the photometer subsystems
The current
Failure or pressure / temperature sensors associated with the
photometer
O3 PHOTO
CONC
concentration of O3
being measured by the
photometer.
- - -
-
-
-
-
Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration
Contamination of the Zero Air supply.
Malfunction of the O3 generator.
Internal A/D converter problem
05744 Rev B
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.3. USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS
Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the calibrators CPU, I2C bus and Relay
PCA are functioning properly.
11.3.1. CPU STATUS INDICATOR
DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of the CPU board, flashes
when the CPU is running the main program loop. After power-up, approximately 30 – 60 seconds, DS5 should
flash on and off. If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files
have become corrupted, contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the
calibrator. If after 30 – 60 seconds neither DS5 is flashing and no characters have been written to the front
panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced.
Mother Board
P/N 04069
CPU Status LED
Figure 11-2:
CPU Status Indicator
11.3.2. RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS
There are seven LEDs located on the Relay PCA. Some are not used on this model.
11.3.2.1. I2C Bus Watchdog Status LEDs
The most important is D1 (see, which indicates the health of the I2C bus.
Table 11-4: Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications
LED
Function
I2C bus Health
Fault Status
Indicated Failure(s)
D1
Continuously ON
Failed/Halted CPU
(Red)
(Watchdog Circuit) or
Continuously OFF
Faulty Mother Board, Keyboard or Relay PCA
Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Mother Board,
Keyboard or Relay PCA
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)
If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu Signal I/O to identify hardware
failures of the relays and switches on the Relay.
184
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.3.2.2. O3 Status LEDs
D9 (Green) – External Zero Air Valve Status
D7 (Green) Photometer Meas/Ref Valve Status
D2 (Yellow) – Dry (zero) Air Pump Status
D15 (Yellow) - Photometer Lamp Heater
D16 (Yellow) – O3 Generator Lamp Heater
D1 (RED)
Watchdog
Indicator
Figure 11-3:
Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting
Table 11-5: Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications
SIGNAL I/O PARAMETER
LED
FUNCTION
DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE
Pump should start /stop
ACTIVATED BY
VIEW RESULT
Failed pump
Failed AC Relay on Relay PCA
Failed Relay PCA
Faulty AC Power Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Valve should audibly change states.
If not:
Failed Valve
Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay PCA
Failed Relay PCA
Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Pump should start /stop
Failed pump
Failed Drive IC on Relay PCA
Failed Relay PCA
Status of AC
powered Dry
Air Pump
D2
Yellow
ZERO_AIR_PUMP
PHOTO_REF_VALVE
O3-PUMP-ON
N/A
Photometer
Meas/Ref
Valve
D7
Green
N/A
N/A
Status of DC
powered
Photometer
Pump
D9
Green
Faulty AC Power Supply (PS2)
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Voltage displayed should change.
If not:
D15
Yellow
Photometer
Heater Status
PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP
Failed Heater
Faulty Temperature Sensor
Failed AC Relay
Faulty Connectors/Wiring
D16
Green
O3 Generator
Heater Status
O3_GEN_HEATER
O3_GEN_TEMP
05744 Rev B
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.4. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures
or performance problems within the M703E calibrator. In most cases, this includes a list of possible components
or subsystems that might be the source of the problem. This section describes how to check individual
components or subsystems to determine if which is actually the cause of the problem being investigated.
11.4.1. VERIFY SUBSYSTEM CALIBRATION
A good first step when troubleshooting the operation of the M703E calibrator is to verify that its major
subsystems are properly calibrated. These are:
Test Channel D A conversion (see Section 6.9.2).
Gas pressure calibration (see Section 8.3).
When optional O3 components are installed, you should also check:
Photometer calibration (see Section 8.1).
O3 generator calibration (see Section 8.2).
11.4.2. AC MAIN POWER
The M703E calibrator’s electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes. As long as
system is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30
seconds show a front panel display.
Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and CPU should turn on as soon as
the power is supplied.
If they do not, check the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF switch on the instruments front panel
CAUTION
SHOULD THE AC POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP, INVESTIGATE AND CORRECT
THE CONDITION CAUSING THIS SITUATION BEFORE TURNING THE
CALIBRATOR BACK ON.
186
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.4.3. DC POWER SUPPLY
If you have determined that the calibrator’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is still not operating properly,
there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s switching power supplies. The supplies can have two
faults, namely no DC output, and noisy output.
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies
and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay PCA follow a standard color-coding
scheme as defined in the following table.
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7
DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12R 12V
Figure 11-4:
Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes
NAME
Dgnd
+5V
TEST POINT#
TP AND WIRE COLOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Black
Red
Agnd
+15V
-15V
Green
Blue
Yellow
Purple
Orange
+12R
+12V
05744 Rev B
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in the table below, and an
oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing
excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p).
Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY PCA TEST POINTS
POWER
VOLTAGE
SUPPLY
ASSY
MIN V
MAX V
FROM TEST POINT
TO TEST POINT
NAME
Dgnd
#
1
3
3
3
1
6
6
NAME
+5
#
2
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS1
PS2
PS2
+5
+15
4.8
5.25
16V
Agnd
+15
4
13.5
-15
Agnd
-15V
5
-14V
-0.05
-0.05
11.75
-0.05
-16V
0.05
0.05
12.5
0.05
Agnd
Chassis
+12
Agnd
Dgnd
Chassis
+12V
Dgnd
1
Dgnd
N/A
7
+12V Ret
+12V Ret
+12 V ret
1
11.4.4. I2C BUS
Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA & D2 on the valve
driver PCA in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display.
Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly the I2C bus is operating properly if:
If D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA are flashing, or
Pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display.
There is a problem with the I2C bus if
Both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA are ON/OFF Constantly and pressing a key on
the front panel DOES NOT results in a change to the display.
If the keyboard interface is working but either of the two Watchdog LEDs is not flashing, the problem may be a
wiring issue between the board and the motherboard
11.4.5. KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
The front panel keyboard, display and Keyboard Display Interface PCA can be verified by observing the
operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel.
Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly:
The vacuum fluorescent display is good if on power-up a “-“ character is visible on the upper left hand
corner of the display.
If there is no “-“ character on the display at power-up and D1 on the Relay PCA or D2 on the valve driver
PCA is flashing then the Keyboard/Display Interface PCA is bad.
The CPU Status LED, DS5, is flashing, but there is no “-“ character on the display at power-up
188
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
If the calibrator starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not
change the display, then there are three possible problems.
One or more of the keys are bad,
The interrupt signal between the Keyboard Display interface and the motherboard is broken, or
The Keyboard Display Interface PCA is bad.
11.4.6. RELAY PCA
The Relay PCA can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the status LEDs located along its
upper edge (see Section 11.3.2 and Figure 11-3:Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting), and using
the SIGNAL I/O submenu under the DIAG menu (see Section 11.1.3) to toggle each LED ON or OFF.
If D1 on the Relay PCA is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question (Pump power, Heater
power, Valve Drive, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function, then the associated control device on the
Relay PCA is bad. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced. The table below
lists the control device associated with a particular function.
Table 11-8: Relay PCA Control Devices
CONTROL
DEVICE
Q2
FUNCTION
IN SOCKET
UV Lamp Heater
O3 Gen Heater
No
No
Q3
All Valves
U5
Yes
No
AC Dry air Pump
DC Photometer Pump
K1
U1
No
11.4.7. PHOTOMETER O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE /FLOW
SENSOR ASSEMBLY
This assembly is only present in calibrators with O3 generator and/or photometer options installed. The
pressure/flow sensor PCA, located at the rear of the instrument between the O3 generator and the photometer
pump (see Figure 3-3) can be checked with a Voltmeter. The following procedure assumes that the wiring is
intact and that the motherboard as well as the power supplies are operating properly:
BASIC PCA OPERATION:
Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not then the board is bad
Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP1 C1 it should be 1o VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not then the board is
bad.
05744 Rev B
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR:
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.
The expected value for this signal should be:
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 20 Hg-in-A, the expected voltage level between TP4 and
TP1 would be between 2870 mVDC and 3510 mVDC.
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 25 Hg-in-A, the expected voltage level between TP4 and
TP1 would be between 3533 mVDC and 4318 mVDC.
If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the board is bad or there is a
pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure
properly.
O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP5 and TP1.
The expected value for this signal should be:
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 25 psig, the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1
would be between 3470 mVDC and 4245 mVDC.
EXAMPLE: If the measured pressure is 30 psig, the expected voltage level between TP4 and TP1
would be between 4030 mVDC and 4930 mVDC.
If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the board is bad or there is a
pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure
properly.
PHOTOMETER FLOW SENSOR
Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1.
With proper flow (800 cc3/min through the photometer), this should be approximately 4.5V (this
voltage will vary with altitude).
With flow stopped (photometer inlet disconnected or pump turned OFF) the voltage should be
approximately 1V.
If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor S3 is bad, the board is bad or there is a leak upstream of
the sensor.
190
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.4.8. MOTHERBOARD
11.4.8.1. A/D Functions
The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I/O
function under the DIAG menu to check the two A/D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily
measured with a voltmeter.
1. Use the Signal I/O function (See Section 11.1.3 and Appendix A) to view the value of REF_4096_MV
and REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of nominal (4096 and 0), and are stable, ±0.5 mV then the basic
A/D is functioning properly. If not then the motherboard is bad.
2. Choose a parameter in the Signal I/O function such as PHOTO_LAMP_DRIVE, O3_GEN_TEMP or
PHOTO_FLOW.
Compare these voltages at their origin (see the interconnect drawing and interconnect list in
Appendix D) with the voltage displayed through the signal I/O function.
If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage (±10
mV) then the motherboard is bad.
11.4.8.2. Test Channel / Analog Outputs Voltage
To verify that the analog output is working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an
analog output step test as follows:
STANDBY
ACT =STANDBY
<TST TST> GEN STBY SEQ
SETUP
Make sure that
the M700E is
in standby
mode.
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
O3
SEQ CFG CLK PASS MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD
0
0
0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these
keys to enter the
correct
PASSWORD
DIAG
SIGNAL I/O
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
DIAG AOUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG OUTPUT
Performs analog
output step test
0% to 100%
10%
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AOUT
[10%]
Pressing the key under “0%” pause the
test. Brackets will appear around the
value: EXAMPLE: [20%]
Pressing the same key again will
resume the test.
05744 Rev B
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
For each of the steps the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the
0% step, which should be within 0mV ±2 to 3 mV. Make sure you take into account any offset that may have
been programmed into channel (See Section 6.9.1.5).
Table 11-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs
FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE
(see Section 6.9.1.3)
100MV
1V
5V
10V
STEP
%
0
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
2
20
40
60
80
100
20 mV
40 mV
60 mV
80 mV
100 mV
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
4
6
8
10
If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges, it is likely that there has been a failure of the either or
both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard.
11.4.8.3. Status Outputs
To test the status output electronics:
1. Connect a jumper between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see table below).
4. Under the DIAG SIGNAL I/O menu (See Section11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until
you get to the output in question.
5. Alternately, turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.
It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.
Table 11-10: Status Outputs Check
PIN
STATUS
(LEFT TO RIGHT)
1
ST_SYSTEM_OK
SPARE
2
3
ST_CAL_ACTIVE
ST_DIAG_MODE
ST_TEMP_ALARM
ST_PRESS_ALARM
SPARE
4
5
6
7 and 8
192
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.4.8.4. Control Inputs
Table 11-11: M703E Control Input Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions
CONNECTOR
Top
INPUT
CORRESPONDING I/O SIGNAL
CONTROL_IN_1
CONTROL_IN_2
CONTROL_IN_3
CONTROL_IN_4
CONTROL_IN_5
CONTROL_IN_6
CONTROL_IN_7
CONTROL_IN_8
CONTROL_IN_9
CONTROL_IN_10
CONTROL_IN_11
CONTROL_IN_12
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
Bottom
J
K
L
The control input bits can be tested by applying a trigger voltage to an input and watching changes in the status
of the associated function under the SIGNAL I/O submenu:
EXAMPLE: to test the “A” control input:
1. Under the DIAG SIGNAL I/O menu (See Section11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until
you get to the output named 0) CONTROL_IN_1.
2. Connect a jumper from the “+” pin on the appropriate connector to the “U” on the same connector.
3. Connect a second jumper from the “” pin on the connector to the “A” pin.
4. The status of 0) CONTROL_IN_1 should change to read “ON”.
05744 Rev B
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.4.8.5. Control Outputs
Table 11-12: Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Corresponding Signal I/O Functions Check
PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT)
STATUS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CONTROL_OUT_1
CONTROL_OUT_2
CONTROL_OUT_3
CONTROL_OUT_4
CONTROL_OUT_5
CONTROL_OUT_6
CONTROL_OUT_7
CONTROL_OUT_8
8
9
CONTROL_OUT_9
CONTROL_OUT_10
CONTROL_OUT_11
CONTROL_OUT_12
10
11
12
To test the Control Output electronics:
1. Connect a jumper between the “E“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see Table 11-12).
4. Under the DIAG SIGNAL I/O menu (See Section11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until
you get to the output in question.
5. Alternately, turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.
It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.
11.4.9. CPU
There are two major types of failures associated with the CPU board: complete failure and a failure associated
with the Disk-On Chip on the CPU board. If either of these failures occur, contact the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact,
the CPU is bad if on powering the instrument:
The vacuum fluorescent display shows a dash in the upper left hand corner.
The CPU Status LED, DS5, is not flashing. (See Section 11.1.4.1.)
There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port on the rear panel even if “? <ret>” is pressed.
In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard, specifically U57
the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its
socket will allow the instrument to startup but the measurements will be incorrect.
If the calibrator stops part way through initialization (there are words on the vacuum fluorescent display)
then it is likely that the DOC has been corrupted.
194
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.4.10. RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS
11.4.10.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting
Teledyne Instruments calibrators use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be
connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been used for many years and as equipment
has become more advanced, connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult.
Generally, every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully.
Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around four general areas:
Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 7.1.2 for connector and pin-out information.
The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See Section 7.1.3.
If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed. See Section 7.2
Incorrect setting of the DTE – DCE Switch is set correctly. See Section 7.1.1.
Verify that cable (03596) that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is
properly seated
11.4.10.2. Troubleshooting Calibrator/Modem or Terminal Operation
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Instruments
calibrator.
Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.
Check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 7.1.1.
Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The M703E sets pin 7 (RTS) to greater than 3
volts to enable modem transmission.
Make sure the BAUD rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and calibrator match, See
Section 7.1.3.
Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or computer; See Section
7.1.5
Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the calibrator (holding down the space bar is
one way); the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data.
Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly.
NOTE
Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Programming Notes”
Teledyne Instruments part number 013500000.
05744 Rev B
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.4.11. TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS
Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the UV lamp and ozone generator. If any of these
temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled, the M703E will perform poorly.
11.4.11.1. Box / Chassis Temperature
The box temperature sensor is mounted to the Motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance.
Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (see Section 11.1.3).
This parameter will vary with ambient temperature, but at ~30oC (6-7 above room temperature) the signal
should be ~1450 mV.
11.4.11.2. Photometer Sample Chamber Temperature
The temperature of the gas in the photometer sample chamber should read approximately 5.0C higher than the
box temperature.
11.4.11.3. UV Lamp Temperature
There are three possible causes for the UV Lamp temperature to have failed.
The UV Lamp heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the six-pin connector
adjacent to the UV Lamp on the Optical Bench.
It should be approximately 30 Ohms.
Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay board, the FET
Driver on the Relay Board may have failed.
Using the PHOTO_LAMP HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL I/O function of the DIAG menu, as
described above, turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater (D15 on the relay board should illuminate as
the heater is turned on).
Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J13 of the Relay Board.
If the FET Driver has failed, there will be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2.
If the FET Driver Q2 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have
failed.
Unplug the connector to the UV Lamp Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure the resistance of the
thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.
The resistance near the 58oC set point is ~8.1k ohms.
196
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.4.11.4. Ozone Generator Temperature
There are three possible causes for the Ozone Generator temperature to have failed.
The O3 generator heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5 and 6 on the 6-pin connector
adjacent to the UV Lamp on the O3 Generator. It should be approximately 5 Ohms.
Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the Relay board, the FET
Driver on the Relay Board may have failed. Using the O3_GEN_HEATER parameter under the SIGNAL
I/O function of the DIAG menu, as described above, turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater. Check the DC
voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J14 of the Relay Board.
If the FET Driver has failed, there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 2.
If the FET Driver checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor in the lamp assembly may have
failed. Unplug the connector to the Ozone Generator Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure the
resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.
11.5. TROUBLESHOOTING THE O3 PHOTOMETER
11.5.1. DYNAMIC PROBLEMS WITH THE O3 PHOTOMETER
Dynamic problems are problems, which only manifest themselves when the photometer is measuring O3
concentration gas mixtures. These can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve.
Since many photometer behaviors that appear to be a dynamic in nature are often a symptom of a seemingly
unrelated static problems, it is recommended that dynamic problems not be addressed until all static problems,
warning conditions and subsystems have been checked and any problems found are resolved.
Once this has been accomplished, the following most common dynamic problems should be checked.
11.5.1.1. Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero
Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10.2
Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.
Confirm that the Source Lamp is fully inserted and that the lamp hold-down thumb- screw is tight.
Check for a dirty Absorption Cell and/or pneumatic lines. Clean as necessary as described in Section
10.2
Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench (the pneumatic line at the lamp end of the bench) and
plug the port in the bench. If readings remain noisy, the problem is in one of the electronic sections of the
instrument. If readings become quiet, the problem is in the instrument's pneumatics.
05744 Rev B
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.5.1.2. Noisy, Unstable, or Non-Linear Span O3 Readings
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section10.2.
Check for proper operation of the meas/ref switching valve as described in Section11.5.2.
Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10.2
Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See Section 11.4.8.1.
Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct. Check and
adjust as required.
11.5.1.3. Slow Response to Changes in Concentration
Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10.2
Check for pneumatic leaks as described in Section 10.2
Check for improper materials in the inlet manifold.
The photometer needs 800 cc3/min of gas flow. Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating total
required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.7).
11.5.1.4. The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings
Confirm that the recorder offset (see Section 6.9.1.5) is set to zero.
Perform an AIO calibration (see Section 6.9.2) and photometer dark calibration (see Section 8.1.4).
11.5.1.5. Cannot Zero
Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 10.2.
Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.
The photometer needs 800 cc3/min of gas flow. Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating total
required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.7).
11.5.1.6. Cannot Span
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10.2.
Check for proper operation of the meas/ref switching valve as described in Section11.5.2.
Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as described in Section 10.2
Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See Section 11.4.8.1.
Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow readings are correct. Check and
adjust as required.
The photometer needs 800 cc3/min of gas flow. Make sure that this is accounted for when calculating
total required output flow for the calibrator (see Section 3.4.7).
198
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.5.2. CHECKING MEASURE / REFERENCE VALVE
To check the function of the photometer’s measure / reference valve:
1. Set the calibrator’s front panel display to show the PHOTO REFERENCE test function (see Section 6.1).
2. Follow the instruction in Sections 8.1.1 and 8.1.3.1 for performing a zero point calibration of the
photometer.
Press XZRO and allow the calibrator to stabilize.
3. Before completing the calibration by pressing the ZERO key, note of the displayed value.
4. Press the final Zero key, then press “NO” when asked, “ARE YOU SURE”.
5. Follow the instruction in Section 8.1.3.2 for performing a span point calibration of the photometer.
Press XSPN and allow the calibrator to stabilize.
6. Before completing the calibration by pressing the SPAN key, note of the displayed value of PHOTO
REF.
If the O3 REF value has decreased by more than 2 mV from its value with Zero-gas, then there is a
"cross-port" leak in the m/r valve.
7. Press the final Zero key then press “NO” when asked, “ARE YOU SURE”.
05744 Rev B
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.6. TROUBLESHOOTING THE O3 GENERATOR
11.6.1. CHECKING THE UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY
NOTE
A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage present - use caution.
It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp
Power Supply, however, the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power
Supply.
1. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that +15VDC is present
between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.
2. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11.4.3.
3. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV
+4500 mVDC ± 10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)
If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the I2C bus is not
communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.
+5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)
If this voltages is les than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power supply or the UV lamp
power supply PCA are faulty...
If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the
Lamp Power Supply.
Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power Supply.
200
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.7. TROUBLE SHOOTING THE OPTIONAL O3 GENERATOR
The only significant components of the O3 generator that might reasonable malfunction is the power supply
assembly for the UV source lamp and the lamp itself.
11.7.1. CHECKING THE UV SOURCE LAMP POWER SUPPLY
NOTE
A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power Supply can be found in Appendix D.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage present - use caution.
It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the UV Lamp or the Lamp
Power Supply, however, the following steps will provide a reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power
Supply.
1. Make sure the calibrator is in STANDBY mode.
2. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that +15VDC is present
between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.
3. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in Section 11.4.3.
4. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following voltages on the UV
lamp power supply PCA (see Figure 9-21):
+800 mVDC ± 10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)
If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or the I2C bus is not
communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.
+5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)
If this voltages is less than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power supply or the UV lamp
power supply PCA are faulty.
If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the UV Lamp than due to the
Lamp Power Supply.
Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power Supply.
05744 Rev B
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
11.8. REPAIR PROCEDURES
11.8.1. REPAIRING SAMPLE FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY
The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly (Teledyne Instruments part number: 001760400)
located on the top of the optical bench. A sintered filter protects the jewel orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to
need replacing, but if it does, or the filter needs replacement please use the following procedure (see the Spare
Parts list in Appendix B for part numbers and kits):
1. Turn off power to the calibrator.
2. Locate the assembly to be repaired, see Figure, 3–3.
3. Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly.
4. Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view in Figure 11.6.
5. Replace the o-rings (p/n OR000001) and the sintered filter (p/n FL000001).
6. If replacing the critical flow orifice itself (P/N 000941000), make sure that the side with the colored
window (usually red) is facing downstream to the gas flow.
7. Apply new Teflon® tape to the male connector threads
8. Re-assemble in reverse order.
Pneumatic Connector, Male 1/8”
(P/N FT_70
Spring
(P/N HW_20)
Sintered Filter
(P/N FL_01)
Critical Flow Orifice
(P/N 000941000)
Make sure it is placed with the
jewel down)
O-Ring
(P/N OR_01)
Purge Housing
(P/N 000850000)
Figure 11-5:
Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly
202
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
11.8.2. DISK-ON-CHIP REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
NOTE
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the
human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will
void the instrument warranty.
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.
Replacing the Disk-on-Chip may be necessary in certain rare circumstances or to load new instrument software.
This will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost. However a backup copy of the
operating parameters are stored in a second non-volatile memory and will be loaded into the new the Disk-on-
Chip on power-up. To change the Disk-on-Chip, follow this procedure.
1. Turn off power to the instrument.
2. Fold down the rear panel by loosening the captive Phillips-head screws on each side
3. Locate the Disk-on-Chip in the rightmost socket near the right hand side of the CPU assembly. Remove
the IC by gently prying it up from the socket.
4. Reinstall the new Disk-on-Chip, making sure the notch in the end of the chip is facing upward.
5. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.
11.9. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If this manual and its trouble-shooting / repair sections do not solve your problems, technical assistance may be
obtained from
TELEDYNE-API, CUSTOMER SERVICE,
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190
Phone: 858-657-9800
Fax: 858-657-9816
Email: [email protected]
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
Before you contact customer service, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C, which is also available
online for electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/.
USER NOTES:
05744 Rev B
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
General Troubleshooting & Repair of the M703E Calibrator
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
USER NOTES:
204
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
12. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE
Teledyne Instruments considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be
extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time.
This section describes how static electricity occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and
assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring.
12.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED
Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer, are very
small, require very little power and operate very quickly. Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them
to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity.
Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the first place.
Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the
surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and
separate, some electrons from one surface are retained by the other.
Materials
Makes
Contact
Materials
Separate
+
+
+
+
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 2
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 4
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3
PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3
NET CHARGE = -1
NET CHARGE = +1
NET CHARGE = 0
NET CHARGE = 0
Figure 12-1:
Triboelectric Charging
If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded, the resulting positive or
negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place, or static. The most common example of
triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon
carpet or linoleum tiled floor. With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge
builds up, quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench, using
a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build
hefty static charges
Table 12-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities
MEANS OF GENERATION
Walking across nylon carpet
Walking across vinyl tile
Worker at bench
65-90% RH
1,500V
250V
10-25% RH
35,000V
12,000V
6,000V
100V
Poly bag picked up from bench
1,200V
20,000V
Moving around in a chair padded
with urethane foam
1,500V
18,000V
05744 Rev B
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
12.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE
Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device. Current
flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels
of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of
them. When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb
craters littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.
A quick comparison of the values in Table 12-1 with the those shown in the Table 12-2, listing device
susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60% of device
failures are the result of damage due to electro-static discharge.
Table 12-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD
DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE
RANGE
DEVICE
DAMAGE BEGINS
OCCURRING AT
CATASTROPHIC
DAMAGE AT
MOSFET
VMOS
10
100
30
1800
100
NMOS
60
GaAsFET
EPROM
60
2000
100
100
140
150
190
200
300
300
300
500
500
500
JFET
7000
500
SAW
Op-AMP
CMOS
2500
3000
2500
3000
7000
500
Schottky Diodes
Film Resistors
This Film Resistors
ECL
SCR
1000
2500
Schottky TTL
Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:
Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device. Even simple contact of a
finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage. A
similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.
When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface
such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or other device. In some cases, charged
device discharges can be the most destructive.
A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring
harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is
connected to ground a discharge will occur.
Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field, a charge may be
induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device. If the device is then momentarily
grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and
grounded somewhere else, a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to
ground.
206
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
12.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE
I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human nervous system is not able
to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much
lower than that.
I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro Static charges are fields whose
lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the
charge.
It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by electro-static discharge can
completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only
partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the
trace. This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low voltage
and current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing
the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached.
These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged
device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity, as well as possible failure and damage
to other pieces of equipment or property.
Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this statement.
Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will be equalized
across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are still trapped and can still build to
high enough levels to cause damage when discharged.
A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in the presence of a
charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking
up to a workbench.
As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by static discharges:
It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its
electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves. This does not
prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging
through the instrument and damaging it.
12.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL
It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not, however difficult to prevent
those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro-static discharge from
occurring.
12.4.1. GENERAL RULES
Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station. Setting up an ESD safe
workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is
needed to create a basic anti-ESD workstation.
Protective Mat
Wrist Stra
Ground Point
Figure 12-2:
Basic anti-ESD Work Station
05744 Rev B
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are available from most
suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed to create a temporary anti-ESD work area
anywhere.
Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer.
An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded
objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels.
Anti-ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no
available grounded plug.
Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one meg-ohm) that protects
you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s power supply.
Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may temporarily bleed off static
charges present at the time, once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will
immediately begin to re-build. In some conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can
rebuild in just a few seconds.
Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags or bins: Even when
you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will
prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from
discharging through it.
Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies
rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, pink-poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with
a liquid (similar to liquid laundry detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic
creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag.
While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does not prevent the build
up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface, these bags will allow charges to bleed
away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the
bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic
is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary
plastic bag.
Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color) provide all of the charge
equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that
completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.
Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also excellent at
dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges.
Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti-ESD
bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape, such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will
generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an
associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.
208
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
12.4.2. BASIC ANTI-ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND
MAINTENANCE
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack
When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power
supply
1. Attach you anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.
Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to any bare metal portion of the
instrument chassis.
This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its
components are connected.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal casing of your
analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static
charges.
4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a non-ESD preventative
surface where static charges may lie in wait.
5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer.
12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.
When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a anti-ESD work bench
1. Plug you anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items
on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away. This will allow any charges you are
carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to
field effects and induction from occurring.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have
plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.
Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.
Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of
the container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded protective mat.
4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive
Device.
Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your
workstation. Never lay them down on any non-ESD preventative surface.
5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins and close the bag or
bin before unplugging your wrist strap.
6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench.
05744 Rev B
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back
When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Instruments analyzer to an Anti-ESD workbench
or back:
1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.
2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a
ground point.
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.
In either case wait several seconds.
4. Place the item in the container.
5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming
a complete protective envelope around the device.
6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag
or bin during travel to dissipate:
Connect your wrist strap to ground.
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a
ground point.
If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface
In either case wait several seconds
7. Open the container.
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric
charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies
in properly sealed ant-ESD containers.
Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during shipping as the packing
materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or
assemblies being shipped make sure that you:
Always unpack shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service by:
1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area
2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area
3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD container at the work station
4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be
returned to Teledyne Instruments
210
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service in
anti-ESD bins, tubes or bags.
WARNING
DO NOT use pink-poly bags.
NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic
component/assembly directly
This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam peanuts,
open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape
DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD tape
1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:
If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a
ground point.
If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.
In either case wait several seconds.
3. Place the item in the container.
4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.
Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.
Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming
a complete protective envelope around the device.
NOTE
If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or containers available, Teledyne
Instruments’ Customer Service department will supply them (see Section 11.9 for contact information).
Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.
USER NOTES:
05744 Rev B
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
A Primer on Eletro-Static Discharge
M703E Calibrator Operators Manual
USER NOTES:
212
05744 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A-1: Model 703E Software Menu Trees, Software Version C.0
APPENDIX A-2: Model 703E Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
APPENDIX A-3: Model 703E Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
APPENDIX A-4: Model 703E Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0
APPENDIX A-5: Model M703E Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0
05745 Rev C
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX A – Version Specific Software Documentation
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
A-2
05745 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
Table A-1: M703E Setup Variables, Software Version C.0
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION
NUMERI
C UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
SETUP VARIABLE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Low Access Level Setup Variables (818 password)
58
Photometer lamp temperature set point and warning
limits.
ºC
ºC
0–100
0–100
PHOTO_LAMP
O3_GEN_LAMP
Warnings:
56–61
48
O3 generator lamp temperature set point and
warning limits.
Warnings:
43–53
O3 concentration range for test channel analog
output.
PPB
—
500
OFF
ON
0.1–20000
OFF, ON
OFF, ON
O3_CONC_RANGE
O3 bench control flag. ON turns on pump and
switches measure/reference valve only in bench
generation mode.
O3_PHOTO_BENCH_ONLY
Zero air pump control. ON turns on zero air
pump when generating ozone.
ZA_PUMP_ENAB
—
ºC
“Hg
25
29.92
0
0–100
15–50
-60–60
Standard temperature for unit conversions.
Standard pressure for unit conversions.
Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.
STD_TEMP
STD_PRESS
CLOCK_ADJ
Sec./Day
Medium Access Level Setup Variables (929 password)
ENGL,
Selects the language to use for the user interface.
—
ENGL
SECD,
EXTN
Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from
the RS-232 interface.
LANGUAGE_SELECT
MAINT_TIMEOUT
Time until automatically switching out of software-
controlled maintenance mode.
Hours
2
0.1–100
Seconds
Samples
2.5
1
0.1–30
1–30
Dwell time after switching measure/reference valve.
Number of O3 detector readings to sample.
O3_DWELL
O3_SAMPLE
Photometer dark offset for measure and reference
readings.
mV
0
-1000–1000
DARK_OFFSET
Samples
Samples
32
6
1–100
1–100
Moving average filter size.
FILT_SIZE
Moving average filter size in adaptive mode.
FILT_ASIZE
Absolute concentration difference to trigger adaptive
filter.
PPB
20
5
1–1000
1–100
FILT_DELTA
FILT_PCT
Percent concentration difference to trigger adaptive
filter.
Percent
Seconds
—
60
ON
0
0–60
Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode.
ON enables adaptive filter; OFF disables it.
FILT_DELAY
FILT_ADAPT
PDELTA_GAIN 2
OFF, ON
-200–200
PPB/dIn-
Hg
Multiplied by difference between measure and
reference pressure and added to concentration.
PDELTA_CAL_DUR 2
Minutes
5
0.1–20
Duration of pressure compensation calibration
procedure.
—
—
1.0
1
0.1–10
Constant factor to keep visible slope near 1.
O3 photometer slope.
O3_SLOPE_CONST
O3_SLOPE
0.850–1.150
-1000–1000
PPB
0
O3 photometer offset.
O3_OFFSET
Target O3 concentration during bench span
calibration.
PPB
400
0.1–10000
O3_BCAL_SET
05745 Rev C
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION
NUMERI
C UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
SETUP VARIABLE
O3_PUMP_STARTUP
O3_PUMP_MIN_FLOW
VALUE RANGE
OFF, ON
DESCRIPTION
O3 pump startup enable. ON enables startup
procedure.
—
ON
0.2
Minimum flow rate that indicates O3 pump is
on.
LPM
0–1
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
30
0.5
10
1–180
0.1–10
0.5–30
O3 pump startup timeout.
O3_PUMP_TIMEOUT
O3_PUMP_PULSE
PHOTO_CYCLE
O3 pump power off pulse duration.
Photometer lamp temperature control cycle period.
Photometer lamp temperature PID proportional
coefficient.
—
—
—
0.5
0.05
0.2
0–10
0–10
0–10
PHOTO_PROP
PHOTO_INTEG
PHOTO_DERIV
Photometer lamp temperature PID integral
coefficient.
Photometer lamp temperature PID derivative
coefficient.
—
1
0
0.001–100
0–5000
Slope term to correct photometer sample flow rate.
O3 generator default drive setting.
PHOTO_FLOW_SLOPE
O3_DEF_DRIVE
mV
CNST,
REF,
O3 generator control mode. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface.
—
BENCH
O3_GEN_MODE
BNCH
O3 generator minimum reliable concentration. Less
than this is treated as zero.
PPB
25
0–100
O3_MIN_CONC
Seconds
Seconds
Samples
—
60
1
1–300
1–60
1–10
0–10
0–10
1–300
1–60
1–10
0–10
0–10
O3 generator reference feedback control delay.
O3 generator reference adjustment frequency.
O3 generator reference filter size.
REF_DELAY
REF_FREQ
4
REF_FSIZE
0.1
0.2
120
10
3
O3 generator reference PID integral coefficient.
O3 generator reference PID derivative coefficient.
O3 generator bench feedback control delay.
O3 generator bench adjustment frequency.
O3 generator bench filter size.
REF_INTEG
—
REF_DERIV
Seconds
Seconds
Samples
—
BENCH_DELAY
BENCH_FREQ
BENCH_FSIZE
BENCH_INTEG
BENCH_DERIV
0.2
0.5
O3 generator bench PID integral coefficient.
O3 generator bench PID derivative coefficient.
—
O3 generator drive stability limit to update
concentration cache.
mV
10
0.1–100
DRIVE_STABIL
O3 generator cache un-normalized concentration
resolution.
PPB
2
2
0.1–20
0.5–30
0–10
CACHE_RESOL
O3_LAMP_CYCLE
O3_LAMP_PROP
Seconds
1/DegC
O3 generator lamp temperature control cycle period.
O3 generator lamp temperature PID proportional
coefficient.
0.2
O3 generator lamp temperature PID integral
coefficient.
Gain
0.01
0–10
O3_LAMP_INTEG
O3 generator lamp temperature PID derivative
coefficient.
Gain
—
0.2
1
0–10
O3_LAMP_DERIV
OUTPUT_FLOW_SLOPE
0.001–100
Slope term to correct output flow rate.
A-12
05745 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION
NUMERI
C UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
SETUP VARIABLE
RS232_MODE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
BitFlag
0
0–65535
RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add values to combine
flags.
1 = quiet mode
2 = computer mode
4 = enable security
8 = enable hardware handshaking
32 = enable multi-drop
64 = enable modem
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors
256 = disable XON / XOFF support
512 = disable hardware FIFOs
1024 = enable RS-485 mode
2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit
4096 = enable command prompt
8192 = even parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
300,
1200,
2400,
4800,
RS-232 COM1 baud rate. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface.
—
19200
9600,
BAUD_RATE
19200,
38400,
57600,
115200
“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0
S0=2 &B0
&N6 &M0
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 COM1 modem initialization string. Sent
verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up
or manually.
—
—
MODEM_INIT
E0 Q1 &W0”
0
RS-232 COM2 mode flags.
0
0–65535
RS232_MODE2
(Same settings as RS232_MODE.)
300,
1200,
2400,
4800,
—
19200
9600,
RS-232 COM2 baud rate.
BAUD_RATE2
19200,
38400,
57600,
115200
“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0
S0=2 &B0
&N6 &M0
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 COM2 modem initialization string. Sent
verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up
or manually.
—
MODEM_INIT2
E0 Q1 &W0”
0
Password
ms.
940331
0
0–999999
0–1000
RS-232 log on password.
RS232_PASS
LINE_DELAY 1
MACHINE_ID
RS-232 inter-line transmit delay (0=disabled).
Unique ID number for instrument.
ID
700
0–9999
05745 Rev C
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION
NUMERI
C UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
SETUP VARIABLE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100 characters
long.
RS-232 interface command prompt. Displayed only if
enabled with RS232_MODE variable. Enclose value
in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232
interface.
—
“Cmd> ”
COMMAND_PROMPT
NONE,
O3 PHOTO
MEAS,
O3 PHOTO REF,
O3 GEN REF,
OUTPUT FLOW,
REGULATOR
PRESSURE,
Diagnostic analog output ID. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232
interface.
—
NONE
SAMPLE
PRESSURE,
TEST_CHAN_ID
SAMPLE FLOW,
SAMPLE TEMP,
PHOTO LAMP
TEMP,
O3 LAMP TEMP,
CHASSIS TEMP,
O3 PHOTO CONC
ON enables passwords.
OFF disables them.
—
—
ON
OFF, ON
PASS_ENABLE
Any string of
exactly 12
characters
Default contact closure output pattern when not
executing a sequence. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface.
“000000000
000”
DEF_CC_OUTPUT
consisting of the
digits 0 and 1 only.
mV
—
4500
ON
0–5000
Photometer lamp power setting.
PHOTO_LAMP_POWER
LAMP_PWR_ENABLE
ON enables photometer lamp power cycling.
OFF disables it.
OFF, ON
Hours
24
0.1
20
0.01–1000
0.02–5
Photometer lamp power cycling period.
Length of time photometer lamp is turned off.
Delay until valid concentration is computed.
LAMP_PWR_PERIOD
LAMP_OFF_DELAY
DET_VALID_DELAY
Seconds
Seconds
1–300
Photometer reference standard deviation must be
below this limit to switch out of startup mode.
mV
cm
3
0.1–100
REF_SDEV_LIMIT
PATH_LENGTH
41.96
30
0.01–99.999
Photometer detector path length.
Internal box temperature set point and warning
limits.
ºC
0–100
BOX_SET
Warnings:
5–45
Molar mass of sample gas for computing
concentrations by weight instead of volume.
MolWt
32
1–99.999
GAS_MOL_WEIGHT
Any character in
the allowed
—
—
“00000000 ”
character set. Up
to 100 characters
long.
Unique serial number for instrument.
SERIAL_NUMBER
DISP_INTENSITY
HIGH,
MED,
LOW,
DIM
Front panel display intensity. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232
interface.
HIGH
A-14
05745 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Software Version C.0
M703E SETUP VARIABLES FOR LATEST REVISION
NUMERI
C UNITS
DEFAULT
VALUE
SETUP VARIABLE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
—
ON
OFF, ON
I2C bus automatic reset enable.
I2C_RESET_ENABLE
Time-of-day clock format flags. Enclose value in
double quotes (“) when setting from the RS-232
interface.
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday name.
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.
“%d” = Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12).
“%j” = Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366).
“%m” = Month as decimal number (01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal number (00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal number (00 – 59).
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100 characters
long.
“TIME=%H:
%M:%S”
—
CLOCK_FORMAT
“%w” = Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday
is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as decimal number (00
– 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as decimal number.
“%%” = Percent sign.
Factory option flags. Add values to combine options.
1024 = enable software-controlled maintenance
mode
2048 = enable Internet option 3
—
0
0–65535
FACTORY_OPT
4096 = enable switch-controlled maintenance mode
1
2
3
Dasibi emulation version only.
Experimental.
iChip option.
05745 Rev C
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0
Table A-2: M703E Warning Messages, Software Version C.0
NAME 1
WSYSRES
MESSAGE TEXT
SYSTEM RESET
DESCRIPTION
Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset.
Data storage was erased.
WDATAINIT
WCONFIGINIT
DATA INITIALIZED
CONFIG INITIALIZED
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or
erased.
WPHOTOLTEMP
WO3GENTEMP
WPHOTOREF
WLAMPSTABIL
WO3GENREF
WO3PUMP
PHOTO LAMP TEMP
WARNING
Photometer lamp temperature outside of warning limits specified
by PHOTO_LAMP variable.
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP
WARNING
O3 generator lamp temperature outside of warning limits
specified by O3_GEN_LAMP variable.
PHOTO REFERENCE
WARNING
Photometer reference reading less than 2500 mV or greater than
4999 mV.
PHOTO LAMP STABILITY
WARNING
Photometer lamp reference step changes occur more than 25%
of the time.
O3 GEN REFERENCE
WARNING
O3 reference detector drops below 50 mV during reference
feedback O3 generator control.
O3 PUMP WARNING
O3 pump failed to turn on within timeout period specified by
O3_PUMP_TIMEOUT variable.
WBOXTEMP
BOX TEMP WARNING
Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by
BOX_SET variable.
WREARBOARD
WRELAYBOARD
WLAMPDRIVER
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
LAMP DRIVER WARN
Rear board was not detected during power up.
Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
Firmware is unable to communicate with either the O3 generator
or photometer lamp I2C driver chip.
WFRONTPANEL
WANALOGCAL
FRONT PANEL WARN
Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.
The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.
ANALOG CAL WARNING
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.
A-16
05745 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0
Table A-3: M703E Test Functions, Software Version C.0
TEST FUNCTION NAME 1
ACTCONC
MESSAGE TEXT
ACT=GENERATE 37 PPB O3
DESCRIPTION
Actual concentration being generated, computed from real-
time inputs.
TARGCONC
OUTPUTFLOW
REGPRESS
BOXTEMP
TARG=GENERATE 100 PPB O3 Target concentration to generate.
OUTPUT FLOW=7.3 LPM
REG PRESSURE=20.1 PSIG
BOX TEMP=31.2 C
Output flow rate (computed from regulator pressure).
Regulator pressure.
Internal chassis temperature.
O3GENREF
O3GENDRIVE
O3GENTEMP
PHOTOMEAS
PHOTOREF
O3 GEN REF=1000.0 MV
O3 GEN DRIVE=800.0 MV
O3 LAMP TEMP=49.7 C
PHOTO MEASURE=2998.8 MV
O3 generator reference detector reading.
O3 generator lamp drive output.
O3 generator lamp temperature.
Photometer detector measure reading.
Photometer detector reference reading.
PHOTO REFERENCE=3000.0
MV
PHOTOFLOW
PHOTOLTEMP
PHOTOSPRESS
PHOTOSTEMP
PHOTOSLOPE
PHOTO FLOW=0.2978 LPM
PHOTO LAMP TEMP=52.6 C
PHOTO SPRESS=29.9 IN-HG-A
PHOTO STEMP=31.8 C
Photometer sample flow rate.
Photometer lamp temperature.
Photometer sample pressure.
Photometer sample temperature.
PHOTO SLOPE=1.000
Photometer slope computed during zero/span bench
calibration.
PHOTOOFFSET
PHOTOSTABIL 2
TESTCHAN
PHOTO OFFSET=0.0 PPB
PHOTO STABIL=0.1 PPB
TEST=2753.9 MV
Photometer offset computed during zero/span bench
calibration.
Photometer concentration stability (standard deviation of 25
bench concentration samples taken 10 seconds apart).
Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected
with TEST_CHAN_ID variable.
CLOCKTIME
TIME=14:48:01
Current instrument time of day clock.
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.
O3 photometer stability measurement option.
2
05745 Rev C
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Software Version C.0
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
USER NOTES:
A-18
05745 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0
Table A-4: M703E Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0
M703E I/O Signal List for Latest Revision
Bit or
Description
Signal Name
Channel
Number
U11, J1004, control inputs, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, read, default I/O address 321 hex
CONTROL_IN_1 –
CONTROL_IN_6
0–5
0 = input asserted
1 = de-asserted
Always 1
6–7
U14, J1006, control inputs, pins 1-6 = bits 0-5, read, default I/O address 325 hex
CONTROL_IN_7 –
CONTROL_IN_12
0–5
0 = input asserted
1 = de-asserted
Always 1
6–7
U17, J1008, control outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 321 hex
CONTROL_OUT_1 –
CONTROL_OUT_8
0–7
0 = output asserted
1 = de-asserted
U21, J1008, control outputs, pins 9-12 = bits 0-3, write, default I/O address 325 hex
CONTROL_OUT_9 –
CONTROL_OUT_12
0–3
0 = output asserted
1 = de-asserted
U7, J108, internal inputs, pins 9-16 = bits 0-7, read, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7 Spare
U8, J108, internal outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7 Spare
U24, J1017, A status outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK
0
0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode
Spare
1
2
ST_CAL_ACTIVE
0 = executing sequence
1 = not executing sequence
ST_DIAG_MODE
3
4
0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode
ST_TEMP_ALARM
0 = any temperature alarm
1 = all temperatures OK
0 = any pressure alarm
1 = all pressures OK
Spare
ST_PRESS_ALARM
5
6-7
U27, J1018, B status outputs, pins 1-8 = bits 0-7, write, default I/O address 324 hex
0-7 Spare
Relay board digital output (PCF8575), write, default I2C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG
ZERO_AIR_PUMP
0
1
Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active
0 = pump on for zero air
1 = off
Spare
2–5
05745 Rev C
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
M703E I/O Signal List for Latest Revision
Bit or
Description
Signal Name
Channel
Number
PHOTO_REF_VALVE
ZA_SHUTOFF_VALVE
6
0 = photometer valve in reference position
1 = measure position
7
0 = open zero air shutoff valve
1 = close
O3_PUMP_ON
8
0 = pump on for photometer to measure O3
1 = off
9–13
14
Spare
PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER
O3_GEN_HEATER
0 = O3 photometer lamp heater on
1 = off
15
0 = O3 generator lamp heater on
1 = off
Front panel I2C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE
LANG2_SELECT
SEQUENCE_LED
AUTO_TIMER_LED
FAULT_LED
5 (input)
0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode
6 (input)
0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)
8 (output)
9 (output)
0 = sequence LED on (executing sequence)
1 = off
0 = automatic timer LED on (automatic sequence timer enabled)
1 = off
10 (output) 0 = fault LED on
1 = off
AUDIBLE_BEEPER
14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)
1 = off
Rear board primary MUX analog inputs
PHOTO_DET
0
1
Photometer detector reading
O3 generator reference detector reading
Spare
O3_GEN_REF_DET
2
PHOTO_SAMP_PRES
3
Photometer sample pressure
Temperature MUX
Regulator pressure
Photometer flow
4
REGULATOR_PRESS
PHOTO_FLOW
5
6
7–8
9
Spare
REF_4096_MV
4.096V reference from MAX6241
Spare
10-11
12
13
14
15
OUTPUT_FLOW
Output flow
Spare
DAC loopback MUX
Ground reference
REF_GND
Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs
Internal box temperature
BOX_TEMP
0
1
PHOTO_SAMP_TEMP
Photometer sample temperature
A-20
05745 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions, Software Version C.0
M703E I/O Signal List for Latest Revision
Signal Name
Bit or
Description
Channel
Number
PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP
O3_GEN_TEMP
2
3
Photometer lamp temperature
O3 generator lamp temperature
Spare
4–7
Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs
DAC channel 0 loopback
DAC channel 1 loopback
DAC channel 2 loopback
DAC channel 3 loopback
Rear board analog outputs
Concentration output #1
Concentration output #2
Spare
DAC_CHAN_1
DAC_CHAN_2
DAC_CHAN_3
DAC_CHAN_4
0
1
2
3
CONC_OUT_1
CONC_OUT_2
0
1
2
3
TEST_OUTPUT
PHOTO_LAMP_DRIVE
O3_GEN_DRIVE
Test measurement output
I2C analog output (AD5321), default I2C address 18 hex
O3 photometer lamp drive (0–5V)
I2C analog output (AD5321), default I2C address 1A hex
O3 generator lamp drive (0–5V)
0
0
05745 Rev C
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX A-5: Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0
M703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX A-5: Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0
Table A-5: Terminal Command Designators, Software Version C.0
COMMAND
? [ID]
ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX
DESCRIPTION
Display help screen and commands list
Establish connection to instrument
Terminate connection to instrument
Display test(s)
LOGON [ID]
LOGOFF [ID]
password
SET ALL|name|hexmask
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]
Print test(s) to screen
T [ID]
name
Print single test
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask
Disable test(s)
SET ALL|name|hexmask
Display warning(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]
Print warning(s)
W [ID]
name
Clear single warning
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask
Clear warning(s)
ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2]
Enter calibration mode
Execute automatic sequence
Compute new slope/offset
Exit calibration mode
ASEQ number
C [ID]
COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN
EXIT
ABORT
Abort calibration sequence
Print all I/O signals
LIST
name[=value]
Examine or set I/O signal
Print names of all diagnostic tests
Execute diagnostic test
Exit diagnostic test
LIST NAMES
D [ID]
ENTER name
EXIT
RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode]
Reset instrument
LIST
Print setup variables
name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]]
Modify variable
name="value"
CONFIG
Modify enumerated variable
Print instrument configuration
Enter/exit maintenance mode
Print current instrument mode
V [ID]
MAINT ON|OFF
MODE
The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are optional
designators. The following key assignments also apply.
Table A-6: Terminal Key Assignments, Software Version C.0
TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS
ESC
Abort line
CR (ENTER)
Ctrl-C
Execute command
Switch to computer mode
COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
LF (line feed)
Ctrl-T
Execute command
Switch to terminal mode
A-22
05745 Rev C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts List
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts List
NOTE
Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by API may result in non-compliance with European
standard EN 61010-1.
05834 - LIST, SPARE PARTS, M703E
05863 - LIST, RECOMMENDED SPARES STOCKING LEVELS, M703E
05746 Rev B
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX B: Spare Parts List
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
B-2
05746 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Parts List
M703E
Part Number
000940100
Description
CD, ORIFICE, .003 GREEN
006120100
022710000
040010000
040030700
040300110
040300210
041200000
041200200
041440000
042010000
042580000
042900100
045230100
046740000
049290000
050700500
052400000
052910100
055220000
055730000
056420000
056430000
057360000
057430000
057660000
057670000
058021400
058110000
058330000
058330100
062870000
063720100
064130000
CN0000073
CP0000026
DS0000025
FL0000001
FL0000003
FL0000020
FM0000004
FM0000005
FM0000006
HW0000005
HW0000020
ASSY, OZONE GEN LAMP (BIR) (OP5)
ABSORPTION TUBE, QUARTZ, M400A/E (KB)
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), 700E PHOTO OPT
ASSY, CONFIG PLUG, 100-115V, M400E/M703E
ASSY, CONFIG PLUG, 220-240V, M400E/M703E
PCA, DET PREAMP w/OP20, M400E/M700E/M703
PCA, DET PREAMP w/OP20 M700E/ M400E/M703
PCA, DC HTR/TEMP, BENCH, M400E/M70XE
ASSY, SAMPLE THERMISTOR, M400E
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT
PROGRAMMED FLASH, E SERIES
PCA, RELAY CARD, E SERIES
ASSY, PUMP, 12VDC, M460M/M700E/M465L
CLIP, THERMISTOR HOLDER
KIT, RELAY BD M703E CONFIGURATION
ASSY, BENCH UV LAMP, (BIR), CR *
ASSY, OPTICAL BENCH, M400E/M703E
ASSY, VALVE W/CONN, VA 59
ASSY, REGULATOR, FILTERS, 20LPM M703E
ASSY, FLOW CNTRL,5LPM, DILUTION, M703E
ASSY, FLOW CONTROL, PHOTO REF, M703E
ASSY, 3/8" VENT ADAPTER, M700E
MANUAL, OPERATORS, M703E
ASSY, DFU FILTER, M703E
ASSY, CARBON SCRUBBER, M703E
PCA, E-SERIES MTHRBRD, M700E, GEN 5-I
ASSY, EXPENDABLES AKIT, M703E*
ASSY, INT PUMP, 115V, M703E
ASSY, INT PUMP, 230V, M703E
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, M703E *
ASSY, DC HEATER/THERM PCA, O3 GEN
POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB)
CPU MOD, AR-B1320, PC/104, 38 (KB)
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FILTER, SS
FILTER, DFU (KB)
CARBON FILTER, DAU, 000 GRADE *(KB)
FLOWMETER (KB)
FLOW RESTRICTOR, 5000-1/4-10000CCM
FLOW RESTRICTOR, 5000-1/4-5000CCM
FOOT
SPRING
05834J - M703E Spare Parts List (DCN 5480)
Page 1 of 2
07/15/09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Parts List
M703E
Part Number
HW0000380
Description
HANDLE, CARRYING, 9.25", BLK *
HW0000453
KIT000253
KIT000254
KIT000289
KIT000290
OP0000014
OP0000031
OR0000001
OR0000016
OR0000026
OR0000034
OR0000039
OR0000048
OR0000077
OR0000089
RL0000015
SW0000051
SW0000059
SW0000060
VA0000014
VA0000060
WR0000008
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37, E SERIES
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38, E SERIES
KIT, UV LAMP P/S PCA, 041660100
KIT, UV LAMP P/S PCA, 041660500
QUARTZ DISC, .75 DIA X 1/16", M400A (KB)
WINDOW, QUARTZ, 1/2"DIA, .063" THICK (KB
ORING, 2-006VT *
ORING, 2-120V
ORING, 2-110 S604-70
ORING, 2-011V FT10
ORING, 2-012V
ORING, 2-112S
ORING, 2-018V
ORING, 2-016V
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-100 PSIG, ALL SEN700e
REGULATOR
CHECK VALVE, B, 1/4" TUBE FITTINGS
POWER CORD, 10A
05834J - M703E Spare Parts List (DCN 5480)
Page 2 of 2
07/15/09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels
M703E
Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level: Standard
Units
6-10
Part Number
Description
1
2-5
11-20 21-30
006120100
022710000
058330000
058330100
040010000
040030700
041200000
041200200
041440000
041660100
041660500
062870000
042010000
042580000
045230100
046740000
052400000
056420000
056430000
058021400
ASSY, OZONE GEN LAMP
1
2
2
4
4
8
1
1
8
8
2
2
8
2
2
2
8
2
4
1
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
ABSORPTION TUBE, QUARTZ
ASSY, INT PUMP, 115V/60Hz
ASSY, INT PUMP, 230V/50Hz
ASSY, FAN, REAR PANEL
PCA, PRESS SENSORS PHOTO OPT
PCA, DET. PREAMP w/OP20, BENCH
PCA, DET. PREAMP w/OP20, O3 GEN
PCA, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR
PCA, UV POWER SUPPLY, O3 GEN,
PCA, UV POWER SUPPLY, OPT BENCH
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
THERMISTOR ASSEMBLY
KEYBOARD
PCA, RELAY CARD
ASSY, PUMP, 12 VDC
ASSY, UV LAMP BENCH
ASSY, FLOW CONTROL, DILUTION
ASSY, FLOW CONTROL, PHOTO REF
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
4
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
DS0000025 DISPLAY
KIT000253
KIT000254
KIT, SPARE, PS37, PWR SUPPLY,+5V,+15V,-15V
KIT, SPARE, PS38, POWER SUPPLY, 12V
05863D - M703E RSSL (DCN 5480)
Printed documents are UNCONTROLLED
07/15/09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model M703E
Calibrator
Operator’s
Manual
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire
Model 703E
CUSTOMER:_______________________________
CONTACT NAME: __________________________
PHONE: _____________________________________
FAX NO. _____________________________________
SITE ADDRESS:____________________________________________________________________________
MODEL TYPE: ______________ SERIAL NO.:_________________ FIRMWARE REVISION:_____________
Are there any failure messages? _______________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________ (Continue on back if necessary)
PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE:
PARAMETER
RECORDED VALUE
ACCEPTABLE VALUE
1% OF TARG
50 – 1000 PPB
2 – 5 LPM
ACT
PPB
TARG
PPB
LPM
PSIG
ºC
OUTPUT FLOW
REG PRESSURE
BOX TEMP
15 ± 2 PSIG @ 5 LPM
20 – 35 ºC
0 – 5000 mV
0 – 5000mV
O3 GEN REF
mV
O3 GEN DRIVE
O3 LAMP TEMP
PHOTO MEASURE
PHOTO REFERENCE
PHOTO FLOW
PHOTO LAMP TEMP
PHOTO SPRESS
PHOTO STEMP
PHOTO SLOPE
PHOTO OFFSET
mV
48 ± 1 ºC
ºC
2500 – 4700 mV
2500 – 4700 mV
0.720 – 0.880 LPM
58 ± 1 ºC
mV
mV
LPM
ºC
-1” AMBIENT IN-HG-A
25 – 48ºC
IN-HG-A
ºC
1 ± 0.15
0 ± 10 PPB
PPB
Depending on options installed, not all test parameters shown below will be available in your calibrator)
1
If ozone generator option installed.
2
If photometer option installed.
3
if permeation tube installed.
What is measured photometer flow rate ____________________________________________________ cc3/min
What is measured O3 generator flow rate? _________________________________________________ cc3/min
What is the photo reference value while generating SPAN: __________________ ZERO:__________________
TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: [email protected]
PHONE: (858) 657-9800
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190
FAX: (858) 657-9816
05747 Rev B
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model M703E
Calibrator
Operator’s
Manual
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire
Model 703E
What are the failure symptoms? ________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
What tests have you done trying to solve the problem? ______________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the
problem that you are encountering.
OTHER NOTES: ____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: [email protected]
PHONE: (858) 657-9800
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190
FAX: (858) 657-9816
C-2
05747 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
Table D-1: List of Included Diagrams and Schematics
Document #
Document Title
05826
Interconnect Drawing M703E
Interconnect List M703E
05827
04420
04422
04421
04259
04354
04395
04524
05703
SCH, PCA 04120, UV DETECTOR, M400E
SCH, PCA 04144, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR
SCH, PCA 04166, UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY, M400E
SCH, PCA 04258, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES
SCH, PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface
SCH, PCA 04394, INTRFC,ETHERNET,E-SERIES
SCH, PCA 04523, RELAY CARD, M100E/M200E/M400E
SCH, PCA 05702, MTHERBRD, E-SER, GEN-4
05748 Rev B
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
D-2
05748 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
Table D-1: List of Included Diagrams and Schematics
Document #
Document Title
05826
Interconnect Drawing M703E
Interconnect List M703E
05827
04420
04422
04421
04259
04354
04395
04524
05703
SCH, PCA 04120, UV DETECTOR, M400E
SCH, PCA 04144, DC HEATER/TEMP SENSOR
SCH, PCA 04166, UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY, M400E
SCH, PCA 04258, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES
SCH, PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface
SCH, PCA 04394, INTRFC,ETHERNET,E-SERIES
SCH, PCA 04523, RELAY CARD, M100E/M200E/M400E
SCH, PCA 05702, MTHERBRD, E-SER, GEN-4
05748 Rev B
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEDYNE API
APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
Model 703E Calibrator Operator’s Manual
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
D-2
05748 Rev B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
R1
SEE TABLE
C1
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
100pf
-15V
R6
1.0K
C4
0.1uf
VR1
5K
PHOTOCELL
D1
R4
5K
TP1
-15V
TEST_PLUG
U1
R5
100
R2
2
3
J1
R3
1.0K
6
PHOTO_OUT
1.0K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OPA124
C3
1.0uF
+
C7
N.P.
+15V
-15V
VCC
+15V
C5
0.1uf
C2
1.0uf
MICROFIT
+
+15V
U2
VCC
+15V
VR2
LT1460S3-2.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
GND GND
VCC GND
REF+ F0
REF- SCK
IN+
IN-
1
2
REF_2.5V
PHOTO_OUT
IN OUT
C6
0.1uf
SDO
CS
GND GND
GND GND
VCC
LTC2413
C8
0.1
PCA VERSION TABLE
PCA#
R1
4.99M
2.0M
04120-0000
04120-0200
PCA, UV DETECTOR PREAMP
The information herein is the
property of API and is
APPROVALS
DRAWN
DATE
submitted in strictest con-
fidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
USA
CHECKED
SIZE DRAWING NO.
REVISION
A
04420
B
APPROVED
LAST MOD.
3-Aug-2004
SHEET
1
1
of
1
2
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
R1
J1
30R, 50W
1
2
3
4
5
6
TH1
HEADER 6
THERMISTOR
Rev
A
Date
8/1/02
Change Description
Eng
KL
Initial release for PCA schematic
SCH, DC HEATER/THERMISTOR
The information herein is the
property of API and is
APPROVALS
DRAWN
DATE
submitted in strictest con-
fidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
CHECKED
SIZE DRAWING NO.
REVISION
B
04422
A
APPROVED
LAST MOD.
SHEET
1-Aug-2002
1
1
of
1
2
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
P2
LAMP OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T1
PE-6196
TP2
TEST_PLUG
R5
TIP126
Q1
P1
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
4.7K, 2W
+15V
1
2
3
4
C4
.01
D3
D4
R4
100
RP2D
4.7K
TP4
TEST_PLUG
C3
220
C2
0.1
+
1N4148
D6
1N4148
D5
HEADER 4
D1
1N4148
IRF520
Q2
IRF520
Q3
1N4148
1N4148
R2
R3
D2
1N4148
5.1K
5.1K
R6
330
VCC
VCC
RP2C
4.7K
R7
3.9K
U3
Vdd GND
C6
.033
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
A0
A1
Vout
SDA
SCL
PD
TP1
TEST_PLUG
+15V
JP1
JUMPER2
U1B
LM358
RP2A
4.7K
AD5321-RM8
1
2
6
5
R14
10
7
+15V
RP2B
4.7K
3
4
C5
.01
3
16
2
VREF
SYNC
VREF
+15V
R12
22
11
14
8
OUTPUT A
NONINV. INPUT
CT
R13
22
5
R1
2.21K
OUPUT B
TP3
TEST_PLUG
R15
150
7
SOFT START
INV. INPUT
SHUTDOWN
OSC. OUTPUT
DISCHARGE
RT
VR2
+15V
1
6
VCC
3
2
C9
0.1
C11
.0047
C12
0.1
10
4
12
9
R16
3.9K
1
GROUND
COMP
+15V
C7
1.0UF
U1A
2
3
C8
0.1
1
U2
SG3525
LM4040CIM3
LM358
+15V
C13
0.1
C1
470
+
C10
0.1
NOTE: THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING PCA'S:
CHANGE NOTES
PCA#
04166-0000
NOTE
M400E BENCH AND IZS LAMP SUPPLY
SHUNT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR BENCH SUPPLY
SHUNT NOT INSTALLED IN J1 FOR IZS SUPPLY
SCH, UV LAMP DRIVER, M450
REV. DATE
8/1/02
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
INITIAL
KL
The information herein is the
property of API and is
APPROVALS
DATE
A
INITIAL RELEASE
submitted in strictest con-
fidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
DRAWN
KL
3/4/97
CHECKED
SIZE DRAWING NO.
REVISION
B
04421
A
APPROVED
LAST MOD.
1-Aug-2002
SHEET
1
1
of
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC
M1
M2
VCC
U1
19
18
17
16
15
D_A
D_B
D_C
D_D
D_E
S8
S7
DS1
DS2
DS3
RN3
220
M3
M4
M5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GRN
YEL
RED
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
OSC
1
2
3
4
5
10
9
MAINT_LED_V+
8
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
VCC
7
6
M6
13
AVL
C1
KBM
12
11
9
KEYBOARD, LED & HORN
U2
S6
X1
X2
X3
X4
.1uF
C6
+
14
OE
10uF
DS4
8
KBD_A0 21
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
A0
A1
A2
INT
P00
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
M7
KBD_A1
KBD_A2
2
3
1
S5
S4
+
DS5
74C923
SCL
SDA
22
23
MAINT_SW
LANG_SELCT
SCL
SDA
DS6
M9
M8
GRN LED
YEL LED
RED LED
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
S3
PCF8575
RI-1000 ONLY
Layout Instructions:
M10
VCC
MF3
A1
VCC
S2
S1
1. Minimum trace width 8 mil would like to have
10 mil traces if possible.
R2
1.0K
U3A
HORN
SPR_I/O_0
SONALERT
4
3
2
1
PRE
CLK
D
2. Please run traces on both and backside but
where possible fill one side with GND.
3. Minimum width for +5_DISP, DISP_PWR,
DISP_RET is 40 mil, except to test points.
4. Minimum width for VCC, GND, Vdd, Vss is
30 mil, except to test points
5
6
Q
Q
RN1
4.7K
MF4
CLR
C7
MM74HC74A
300pF
VCC
S9
RI-1000 ONLY
U4
VCC
J3 TO/FRM DISPLAY
OPT. MAINT SWITCH
S12
DISP_DA_A0
DISP_DA_A1
DISP_DA_A2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AO
A1
A2
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
U3B
10
11
12
13
PRE
CLK
D
9
8
KYBRD_INT
VCC
Q
Q
J4
SCL
SDA
14
15
9
DISP_WR
DISP_BUSY
T8201
SCL
SDA
RN5
4.7K
MAINT SW
MAINT_SW
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
CLR
MAINT SW RET
MAINT LED V+
MAINT LED
LANG SW
LANG SW RET
SPR I/O_0
SPR I/O RET
SPR I/O_1
SPR I/O RET
SPR I/O_2
MAINT_LED_V+
MAINT_LED
LANG_SELCT
MM74HC74A
PCF8574
DISPLAY DATA
KBD_A0
KBD_A1
KBD_A2
13
INT
SPR_I/O_0
SPR_I/O_1
SPR_I/O_2
DISP_DA_A0
DISP_DA_A1
DISP_DA_A2
JP2 I2C TERMINATION
DISP_CN_A0
DISP_CN_A1
DISP_CN_A2
SCL
SDA
DISP_PWR
1
3
2
4
DISP_RET
+5_DISP
DISP_PWR_EN must
be high for display to
be powered.
VCC
Q1
SPR I/O RET
DEFAULT ADDRESS SELECTS FOR I2C TO PARALLEL
DECODERS:
+5_DISP
C17
OPT. LANG. SWITCH
S13
JP1
VCC
1
2
3
6
5
4
RN2
4.7K
D
ADRS SLCTS
KEYBOARD (KBD_A0 - A2)
1 1 1
1500uF
G
S
DISPLAY CONTROL
U5
3M-2514-6002UB
SI3443DV
DISPL CONTROL (DISP_CN_A0 -A1)
0 1 1
JP5
DISP_CN_A0
DISP_CN_A1
DISP_CN_A2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DISP_WR
DISP_BUSY
DISP_PWR_EN
MAINT_LED
GND
VCC
+5_DISP
BUSY
SDA
TP4
KYBRD INT
TP5
AO
A1
A2
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
DISP_PWR_OVR
TP1
TP2
TP3
1
2
NOTES:
SDA
SCL
KYBRD_INT
VCC
+5_DISP
MCP120T
Vdd RST
1. This schematic is based on
the PWB PN, 03974 and
applies to PCA PN, 03975
SCL
SDA
14
15
9
SCL
SDA
1
3
MMBT3904
DISP_PWR
DISP_RET
TP7
SCL
10
11
12
R3
Q2
U6
TP6
TP8
TP9
R20
1K
R4
4.7K
DISP_BUSY
DISP_PWR
DISP_RET
4.7K
13
INT
+5_DISP
4.85V DTCT
VCC
(U1)
(U2)
(U4)
(U45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCL
DISP_RET
SPR_I/O_1
SPR_I/O_2
PCF8574
+5_DISP
+5_DISP
VCC
KYBRD_INT
KYBRD_INT
C11
220pF
C12
C10
C14
C4
C9
C8
C13
C2
.1uF
C3
C5
C15
.1uF
C16
+
+
VCC
DISP_RET
JP3
DISP_RET
220pF
220pF
100uF
.1uF
220pF
220pF
10uF
.1uF
.1uF
.1uF
SDA
10
SDA
10
Title
J1
J2
JP4
Schematic for PCA #04258 and PCB #04257, Keyboard/Display Interface for E series
DISP_RET
Size
B
Number
Revision
a
04259
Date:
File:
21-Mar-2002
Sheet of
N:\YHWork\M300B\keyboard\04257a\04259A.ddDb rawn By:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
+15V
R2
1.1K
S1
D
C
B
A
VR2
D
C
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR
2
3
C2
1.0UF
1
LM4040CIZ
TP4 TP5
S1/S4_OUT S2_OUT
TP3
S3_OUT
TP2
10V_REF
TP1
GND
+15V
J1
3
2
1
6
5
4
S2
1
2
3
4
5
6
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR
MINIFIT6
+15V
R1
499
S3
VR1
1
2
3
FLOW SENSOR
FM_4
2
3
C1
1.0UF
CN_647 X 3
1
+15V
LM4040CIZ
S4
C3
1.0
1
2
3
4
CON4
SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES
The information herein is the
property of API and is
APPROVALS
DATE
submitted in strictest con-
fidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
DRAWN
A
CHECKED
APPROVED
SIZE DRAWING NO.
REVISION
B
04354
D
LAST MOD.
3-Dec-2007
SHEET
1
1
of
1
2
3
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
B
C
D
+5V
+5V
IC102:A
74AC00D
IC102:D
74AC00D
Y102
C107
15pF
+5V
IC103:A
74ACT32
C106
15pF
+5V
+5V
1
2
+5V
+5V
C101
100nF
C102
100nF
+5V
+5V
1
2
12
13
3
IC101
IC105
S
S
3
6
11
C118
100nF
9
7
9
8
2
2
5
6
6
9
8
5
9
0
9
5
IC103:D
74ACT32
R110
4K99
74ACT138
CS8900A-CQ
9
S
20.0 MHz
16
VCC
13
12
R111
4K99
A15
A16
A17
1
2
3
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
33
77
76
X
X
D
V
D
D
1
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
B
C
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
11
IOCS16
MEMCS16
SBHE
REFRESH
AEN
IOCHRDY
SLEEP
TEST
IC102:B
74AC00D
34
36
49
63
64
T
A
L
1
T
A
L
2
V
D
D
2
V
D
D
3
V
D
D
4
V
D
D
2
V
D
D
1
V
D
D
3
+5V
+5V
1
1
IC103:B
74ACT32
6
4
5
4
+5V
C103
100nF
C128
100nF
R112
499R
6
4
5
8
DS101
ACT,
S
G1
G2
G3
A18
A19
5
9
7
61
62
29
28
100
99
78
93
92
IC103:C
74ACT32
8
IOR
IOW
MEMR
MEMW
LANLED
GND
IC102:C
74AC00D
R113
499R
DS102
LINK
9
10
8
2
7
11
13
15
12
14
16
17
75
IC104
ELCS
LINKLED/ HC0
BSTATUS/ HC1
RES
+5V
MT1
MT2
10
C104
22pF
CHIPSEL
DMARQ2
DMARQ1
DMARQ0
DMACK2
DMACK1
DMACK0
CSOUT
RESET
C0561AD-L
14
13
1
42
31
18
41
VCC
X1
-BHE
LANDRQ
ALE
NC PL101:14
NC PL101:13
S
Y101
18.432MHz
+5V
C105
22pF
R114
4K99
C109
100nF
1
15
43
44
+5V PL101:1
X2
CLKO
50 A19
39 A18
A17
45 A16
49 A15
47
60
59
58
54
53
52
51
50
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
+5V PL101:15
T101
TG43-1406N
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
SA19
SA18
SA17
SA16
SA15
SA14
SA13
SA12
SA11
SA10
SA9
SA8
SA7
SA6
SA5
SA4
SA3
SA2
SA1
52
68
8
-WR
-RD
2
+5V
J101 2
1:1
1
2
3
16
6
2
16
RXD-
RX-
14
21
GND PL101:2
-UCS
-LCS
51
48
53
56
54
38
37
33
46
36
35
34
19
57
(5) GND PL101:16
R102
4.99K
R101 +5V
4.99K
R115
100R
15
14
S
40
65
URTINT
-LMSEL
12
91
88
3
2
RXD+
TXD-
RX+
TX-
STATUS PL101:12
R116
24R3
IC106
MAX237
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
1:
2
6
7
8
11
10
9
9
13
VCC
C2+
C119
100nF
R103
499
R104
499
S
10
C1+
S
S
C108
68pF
R117
24R3
C120
1uF 16V
S
S
A0
SA0
12
11
14
15
87
1
4
5
7
8
9
C1-
V+
C2-
V-
TXD+
TX+
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
S1
25
10
11
23
13
16
17
22
9
24
2
3
4
5
18
19
20
21
24
25
26
27
74
73
72
71
68
67
66
65
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
SD15
SD14
SD13
SD12
SD11
SD10
SD09
SD08
SD7
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
27
28
29
32
66
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
DS103 DS104
TXD RXD
C121
1uF 16V
S
S
C110
100nF
84
83
82
81
80
79
DO-
DO+
CI-
10
S2
DB-9 PIN NUMBERS IN PARENS.
RS-232
TTL
3
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
1
24
20
7
6
18
19
21
26
63
58
60
20
3
TO1
TO2
TO3
TO4
TO5
TI1
TI2
TI3
TI4
TI5
TXD1
-DTR1
-RTS1
-DCD1
-RI1
(2) TXD PL101:3
(6) DTR PL101:4
(8) RTS PL101:5
CI+
DI-
DRCI D PPLL110011::67
(1)
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
D4
D3
D2
D1
8
9
10
4
23
16
5
22
17
30
15
59
12
61
62
55
67
C111
100nF
C112
100nF
C113
100nF
C114
100nF
RI1
RI2
RI3
RO1
RO2
RO3
RXD1
-DSR1
-CTS1
-RES
HLDA
HOLD
GND
SD2
SD1
SD0
DI+
(3) RXD PL101:8
(4) DSR PL101:9
(7) CTS PL101:10
6
7
S
S
S
D0
11
8
35
30
31
32
D
V
S
S
1
D
V
S
S
3
3
4
5
6
R106
4.99K
+5V
GND
INTRQ3
INTRQ2
INTRQ1
INTRQ0
EECS
EESK
RESET PL101:11
D
V
S
S
1
D
V
S
S
2
D
V
S
S
3
D
V
S
S
4
A
V
S
S
0
A
V
S
S
1
A
V
S
S
2
A
V
S
S
3
A
V
S
S
4
+5V
+5V
+5V
EEDATAOUT
EEDATAIN
64
GND
LANINT
A
A
+5V
+5V
C115
100nF
C116
100nF
C117
100nF
C127
100nF
S
S
S
8
1
0
2
3
5
5
5
7
7
0
1
8
9
8
6
9
4
9
6
IC107
TL7705
+5V
+5V
PL102-1
R105
4.99K
7
8
5
6
4
C129
10uF 16V
PL102-2
R108
10.0K
R109
10.0K
SENSE
VCC
S
2
3
1
RESIN
CT
RESET
RESET
GND
TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION
INSTRUMENTATION INC.
4
4
NOTES:
Title
Size
REF
R107
10.0K
1
2
3
THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO PWB 04393 REV. A.
ALL RESISTANCES IN OHMS, 1%
ETHERNET INTERFACE SCHEMATIC
C126
100nF
C124
1uF 16V
C125
1uF 16V
S
S
S
Number
Rev
PARTS DENOTED "S" ON SECONDARY SIDE OF PCA
04395
B
A
Date
Filename
Thu Jul 25 2002
SLAN.S03
Drawn by
Sheet
1
of
1
A
D
B
C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
Name
04524-p1.sch
Name
04524-p2.sch
Name
04524-p3.sch
Title
M100E/200E/400E RELAY PCA SCHEMATIC
Size
B
Number
04522
Revision
D
0
0
Date:
File:
16-May-2007
Sheet of
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:
6
1
2
3
4
5
Te
Te
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
General Trace Width Requirements
1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil
2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils
3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils
4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil
isolation/creepage distance around them
5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils.
6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils.
J1
AC_Line
AC_Neutral
1
2
3
4
4 PIN
RELAY0
RELAY1
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
VCC
RN1
330
R1
R2
2.2K 2.2K
RELAY0
K1
RELAY1
K2
RELAY2
K3
JP2
Heater Config Jumper
J2 16 PIN
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
2
4
RELAY2
COMMON0
LOAD0
TS0
1
2
JP1
I2C_Vcc
RELAY0
I2C_Vcc
3
3
RELAY0
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
+-
+-
+-
SLD-RLY
4
5
TS0
TS1
TS2
COMMON1
LOAD1
TS1
6
SLD-RLY
SLD-RLY
7
RELAY1
RELAY2
8
HEADER 4X2
RELAY1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
COMMON2
LOAD2
TS2
D1
WDOG
I2C_Vcc
D2
D3
D4
D7
D8
D9
D10
AC_Neutral
RED
RELAY2
U1
YEL
RL0
YEL
RL1
YEL
RL2
GRN
VA0
GRN
VA1
GRN
VA2
GRN
VA3
C1
0.1
21
2
4
A0
P00
P01
P02
5
A1
A2
3
6
+12V
1
7
INT P03
P04
SCL P05
SDA P06
P07
J3
8
IO3
IO4
22
23
9
1
U2A
10
11
13
14
2
3
4
5
F1
F2
1
2
4A PTC INTERRUPTOR
4A PTC INTERRUPTOR
P10
P11
15 IO10
16 IO11
17 IO12
18 IO13
19 IO14
20 IO15
P12
CON5
SN74HC04
U2B
P13
DD4
6A RECTIFIER
DD1
6A RECTIFIER
P14
VCC
P15
Q1
VCC
P16
3
5
4
P17
VALVE_POWER
R3
J4
20K
R5
10K
PCF8575
VCC
U5
1
1
16
15
14
10
9
VALVE0
2
IN 4
IN 3
OUT4
U2C
U4
I2C_Vcc
2
IRF7205
JP4
K
3
3
VALVE1
ENABLE OUT 3
4
6
6
IN 2
IN 1
OUT 2
K
OUT 1
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
VALVE2
6
VBATT
VOUT
VCC
RESET
RESET'
WDO'
8
7
VALVE3
8
U2D
U2E
GND
CD IN'
1
2
3
C3
1
R6
10K
UDN2540B(16)
BATT_ONCD OUT'
LOW LINE' WDI
OSC IN
OSC SEL
9
8
8 PIN
VLV_ENAB
PFO'
PFI
WTCDG OVR
DD2
+
C16
+
+
15V TVS
C5
C6
JP3
R4
1M
D17
DL4148
C4
10/16
2000/25
MAX693
11
10
+
22 uF
1 2
10/16
C2
0.001
find low ESR electroytic
HEADER 1X2
+12RET
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7
+12V
DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12RT
DC PWR IN
J5
KEYBRD
J7
MTHR BRD
SYNC DEMOD
J10
SPARE
J11
REV
AUTH
DATE
J8
J9
J12
J13
B
CAC
10/3/02
CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX
Add alternate thermocouple connectors
DGND
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D
RJ
5/16/07
AGND
+15V
3
3
3
4
4
4
AGND
-15V
5
5
5
6
6
6
+12RET
+12V
7
7
Title
7
8
8
Schem, M100E/M200E/M400E Relay PCB
8
EGND
CHS_GND
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
Size
B
Number
04524
Revision
10
D
CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH
Printed documents are uncontrolled
4
1
3
CON10THROUGH
Date:
File:
16-May-2007
Sheet of
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:
6
1
2
3
5
Te
T
Te
T
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Aux Relay Connector
AC_Line
JP6
Heater Config Jumper
J18 16 PIN
1
COMMON3
LOAD3
TS3
RELAY3
RELAY4
2
RELAY3
3
RN2
330
RELAY4
RELAY3
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
4
5
6
TS3
TS4
COMMON4
LOAD4
TS4
7
RELAY4
8
RELAY3
K4
RELAY4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
K5
2
1
3
2
4
1
3
AC_Neutral
I2C_Vcc
4
I2C_Vcc
+-
+-
JP7
SLD-RLY
SLD-RLY
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
JP7 Configuration
7
6
D5
D6
D11
D12
GRN GRN
D13
D14
D15
D16
GRN
Standard Pumps
60 Hz: 3-8
50 Hz: 2-7, 5-10
World Pumps
PUMP
J20
YEL
YEL
GRN
GRN
GRN
60Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7
50Hz/100-115V: 3-8, 4-9, 2-7, 5-10
60Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6
MINI-FIT 10
1
2
3
4
VA5
VA6
VA7
50Hz/220-240V: 3-8, 1-6, 5-10
VA4
TR0
TR1
RL3
RL4
AC_Neutral
AC_Line
IO3
IO4
IO10
IO11
IO12
VCC
U3A
VALVE_POWER
J6
IO13
1
2
U6
1
1
16
Valve4
Valve5
Valve6
Valve7
IN 4
15
OUT4
2
2
3
6
7
8
IN 3
K
3
14
10
9
SN74HC04
U3D
VLV_ENAB
ENABLE OUT 3
4
IN 2
IN 1
OUT 2
K
5
6
OUT 1
7
9
8
8
9
UDN2540B(16)
10
11
12
13
14
U3B
U3F
DD3
15V TVS
U3E
U3C
C17
+
IO14
3
4
11
5
10
6
22 uF
CON14
VCC
+12RET
IO15
13
12
J19
+12V
+12V
1
2
C13
0.1
VCC
MINIFIT-2
U2F
Q2
IRL3303
13
12
J14
1
2
MINIFIT-2
Q4
IRL3303
Q3
IRL3303
Use 50 mil traces
J21
Title
+12V
1
2
Schem, M100E/M200E/M400E Relay PCB
+12RET
MINIFIT-2
Size
B
Number
04524
Revision
D
Printed documents are uncontrolled
1
2
3
Date:
File:
16-May-2007
Sheet of
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:
6
2
3
4
5
Te
T
Te
T
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V
R23
C7
TC1_KCOMPA
TC1_JCOMPA
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
6.81K
0.1
C12
0.01
-15V
ZR3
4.7V
TC1_GND
R21
1k
R19
3M
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
U7A
1
OMEGA
J15
3
J17
F4
1/8 AMP FUSE
1
2
3
4
R13
10K
-
2
2
1
+
TC1_GNDTCA
R25
14K
R7
20K
OPA2277
F3
1/8 AMP FUSE
J15A
C10
0.1
MICROFIT-4
-15V
ZR1
3V
-
R15
10K
2
1
TC1_JGAINA
TC1_JGAINB
TC1_GND
ZR2
3V
+
0.01
C8
+15V
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
HAMITHERM
R17
5K
1M
R11
U8
TC1_5MVA
TC1_5MVB
3
1M
TOUT
R10
TC1_JGAINA
TC1_5MVA
TC1_JCOMPA
TC1_KCOMPA
TC1_GNDTCA
TC2_JGAINA
TC2_5MVA
TC2_JCOMPA
TC2_KCOMPA
TC2_GNDTCA
TC1_JGAINB
TC1_5MVB
TC1_JCOMPB
TC1_KCOMPB
TC1_GNDTCB
TC2_JGAINB
TC2_5MVB
JP5
1
R9
8
7
5
C9
0.1
MICROFIT-20
J
K
2
3
10K
4
TC PROGRAMMING SOCKET
5
R-
6
7
8
LT1025
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
* GROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES ARE EXPECTED BY DEFAULT
No extra connections are necessary for grounded thermocouples
* FOR UNGROUNDED THERMOCOUPLES
short TCX_GNDTCA to TCX_GNDTCB
* FOR K THERMOCOUPLE:
1) Install CN0000156 for thermocouple connector
2) Short only TCX_KCOMPA to TCX_KCOMPB on TC Programming Plug
4) Leave TCX_JCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected
* FOR J THERMOCOUPLE:
1) Install CN0000155 for thermocouple connector
2) Short TCX_JCOMPA to TCXJCOMPB on TC Programming Plug
3) Short TCX_JGAINA to TCX_JGAINB on TC Programming Plug
4) Leave TCX_KCOMPX pins of the plug unconnected
* DEFAULT OUTPUT IS 10 mV PER DEG C
-15V
TC2_JCOMPB
TC2_KCOMPB
TC2_GNDTCB
R20
3M
TC2_KCOMPA
TC2_JCOMPA
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
OMEGA
J16
F6
ZR4
1/8 AMP FUSE
-
2
U7B
4.7V
1
+
R24
TC2_GNDTCA
5
F5
7
6.81K
1/8 AMP FUSE
R18
6
ZR6
3V
R22
ZR5
R16
TC2_GND
10K
J16A
+15V
10K
R26
14.3K
R8
20K
OPA2277
1k
-
2
1
3V
C15
0.01
+
C11
0.01
TC2_JGAINA
TC2_JGAINB
THERMOCOUPLE CONNECTOR
HAMITHERM
U10
TC2_GND
3
R28
5K
TOUT
R14
TC2_5MVA
TC2_5MVB
1M
8
7
5
TC2_JCOMPB
TC2_KCOMPB
J
K
R12
1M
C14
0.1
R27
10K
R-
LT1025
Title
Schem, M100E/M200E/M400E Relay PCB
Size
B
Number
04524
Revision
D
Printed documents are uncontrolled
3
3
Date:
File:
16-May-2007
Sheet of
N:\PCBMGR\04522cc\source\04522D.drdabwn By:
6
1
2
3
4
5
Te
Te
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
U2
74HC154
U6A
J101A
PC104
23
22
21
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
1
11
A
B
C
D
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15
DIGIO0
OC
CLK
3
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
DIGIO1
IOW
J108
GND
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
DO0
DI6
DI4
DI2
DI0
DO6
DO4
DO2
DO0
DI7
DI5
DI3
DI1
DO7
DO5
DO3
DO1
DIGIO2
DIGIO3
DIGIO4
TEMP
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DI0
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
74HC32
DACV
VCC
9
WRDAC
VFPROG
CHGAIN
VFREAD
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
D
C
B
A
D
TP44
J102
TP2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A8
A9
9
0X32C
U7
74HC574
U8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
74HC541
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
AEN
VCC
C38
0.15 uF, ceramic
18
19
1
19
RN16
47Kx8
G1
G2
G1
G2
19 A12
18 A13
17 A14
16 A15
15
14
13
12
11 AEN
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0X32F
IOR
DI5
DI6
DI7
VCC
D0
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
R59
47k, 5%
U1
74HC688
ENAB2
U4B 74HC74
10
11
D0 12
9
8
MICROFIT-16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
PRE
CLK
D
Q
20
19
VCC
P=Q
Q
3
18
5
16
7
14
9
12
2
17
4
15
6
13
8
11
13
B0
B7
B1
B6
B2
B5
B3
B4
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A3
A4
CLR
IOCHRDY
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
U51D
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
I2C_RESET
U4A
12
13
DS5
11
VCC
TC1
R24
ADDR=0x360 (DEFAULT)
ADDR = 0x320 (JP1 INSTALLED)
4
3
2
5
6
1
2
PRE
CLK
D
Q
Q
2.2K, 5%
D1
TP56
74HC08
1
VCC
X3
1
VCC
LED, RED, smt 1206
CLR
Pins 1&2 shorted on PCA
JP7
R4
74HC74
C39
2.2K, 5%
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic
IOCHECK
AEN
C
1
2
3
R3
2.2K, 5%
1
JITO-2-DC5F-10OHM
4
J107
EN
IOEN
DGND
SDA
VCC
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
R38
HEADER3-DEFAULTED-1
R25
IOW 1
2
2.2K, 5%
U10
PCF8584
10
3
GND
SYSCLK
1
4
5
6
I2C_RESET
CLK
IACK
INT
A0
RESET
U51B
NOT INSTALLED
D[0..7]
JP1
2
4
5
INT
A0
20
74HC32
U50A
VCC
1
6
INLINE-6
J106
19
IDC-HEADER
U50B
KBINT
SDA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
17
16
18
74HC08
CS
RD
WR
IOR
IOW
3
2
I2C_DRV_RST
SCL
SDA
VCC
A12
A13
4
5
U5A 74HC74
U50C
6
9
4
3
2
1
5
6
PRE
CLK
D
Q
Q
8
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
SCL
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
10
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
DGND
PC104CD
74HC08
U50D
GND
GND
OSC
CLR
U6C
74HC08
J101B
PC104
9
MICROFIT-8
A14
A15
12
13
8
VCC
+5V
VCC
JP6
11
10
10
2
1
BALE
TC
VSS
IDC-HEADER
74HC32
47k, 5%
R5
DACK2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
SYSCLK
REFRESH
DRQ1
DACK1
DRQ3
DACK3
IOR
IOW
SMEMR
SMEMW
(KEY)
+12V
ENDXFR
-12V
DRQ2
-5V
IRQ9
+5V
U39
B
U3
74HC08
LTC699CS8
JP2
1
2
4
2
INT
shorted - sldr side
1
C3
0.15 uF, ceramic
2
74AHC1GU04
6
7
JP3
IDC-HEADER
WDI RESET
I2C_RESET
SHDN
IOR
IOW
IOR
IOW
SHDN
U5B
PRE
CLK
D
10
11
12
13
9
8
U51A
Q
Q
1
2
U6D
IRQ12
3
IOEN
12
13
SHDAC
+12V
SHDAC
IRQ10
JP5
11
CLR
JP4
74HC74
74HC08
74HC32
R61
RESETDRV
47k, 5%
GND
A
KBINT
Title
Notes:
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
IDC-HEADER
1) This schematic is for PCA #05702
2) This schematic is for PCB 05701
Size
Orcad B
Number
Revision
05703
A
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
1
of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
J1010
DB9 FEMALE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RX1
TX1
RS-GND1
RTS1
CTS1
DS2
DS1
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
2
1
1
2
TV1
TV ARRAY
SMDA15LCC
LED, GRN, smt 1206
LED, RED, smt 1206
R111
TX for Com1
RX for Com1
-15V
R11
4.9K, 5%
R12
10k, 1%
4.9K, 5%
J1013
J12
DCE side of switch is side towards pin 1,
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC
RX0
RTS0
TX0
CTS0
RS-GND0
RX1
RTS1
TX1
CTS1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
RXD
TXD
NC
GND
NC
RTS
CTS
NC
3
4
5
8
6
7
RS-GND1
9
DB9M
DTE
10
12
TV ARRAY
11
VCC
TV2
SMDA15LCC
R2
2.2K, 5%
R13
R14
R1
INLINE-12
SW1001
SW PUSHBUTTON-4PDT
VCC
2.2K, 5%
NOT INSTALLED
NOT INSTALLED
R10
DS4
DS3
1
NOT INSTALLED
2
1
LED, GRN, smt 1206
TX for Com2
2
LED, RED, smt 1206
RX for Com2
MT6
MT7
MT8
MT9
MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE
MOUNTING HOLE
TP13 TP14
TP15 TP16 TP17 TP18
VCC
+12V +12VRET +15V
-15V
MT1
MT2
MT3
MT4
MT5
MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE
MOUNTING HOLE
MOUNTING HOLE
J15
8
7
1
4
6
3
2
5
9
10
+12V
AUX DC POWER IN
+12RET
DGND
+15V
VCC
-15V
AGND
+5V
U51C
9
8
AGND
EGND
CHASGND
10
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
D1
C1
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
+
+
C2
74HC08
MOLEX-10
MBRS340CT
D9
D1, D9 & R35 must be
within 1" of J15
MBRS340CT
R35
NOT INSTALLED
Title
Size
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
Number
Revision
05703
A
Orcad B
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
2
of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
C6
ISOLATED 0-20MA OPTIONAL BOARDS
ANALOG VOLTAGE & CURRENT OUTPUTS
+15V
U29A
TP21
C7
C15
10000 pF
C20
10000 pF
-15V
+15V
10000 pF
C21
FE BEAD
10000 pF
0.15 uF, ceramic
J19
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
L1
DAC RANGE &2 OFFSET PROGRAM
40K
R15
3
2
+
-
L2
L3
L4
OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL
1
VREF
J1020
IDC-8
J21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
C
B
A
0
0G
1
1G
2
2G
3
3G
D
C
B
A
C4
C5
C13
C19
R63
10k, 1%
TV3
TV4
TV ARRAY
10000 pF 10000 pF
10000 pF 10000 pF
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
TV ARRAY
2
4
6
8
1
C8
SMDA15LCC
TC2
3
5
7
C53
L5
L6
L7
-15V
0.15 uF, ceramic
0.15 uF, ceramic
U20B
U29B
DACV
DACV
4
6
5
IDC-8
J23
SMDA15LCC
L15
U30
74HC574
+
-
TERMBLOCK-8
IOW
IOW
5
6
FE BEAD
1
11
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
J22
OC
CLK
2
4
6
8
1
1
2
74HC32
3
5
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DAC3V
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19 CSDACA
18 CSRANGE1
17 CSDACB
16 CSRANGE2
15
14
13
12
3
4
5
6
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
CSDACA
IDC-8
OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL
CSDACB
7
8
9
10
DAC0
DAC1
DAC2
DAC3
U20C
9
8
CLK
10
WRDAC
0.15 uF, ceramic
C9
MICROFIT-10
74HC32
+15V 0.15 uF, ceramic
C10
D[0..7]
+15V
U36A
TP26
U35A
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
TP27
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
3
+
1
-
3
2
+
-
1
2
R16
DAC0V
DAC0V
DUAL DAC A1
DUAL DAC A2
U34
DAC 2
U31
DOUT VOA
GND
VCC
CLK VOB
U32
U33
DOUT VOA
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
23
22
24
21
R17
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
23
22
24
21
18.7K
A1
W1
B1
AGND1
A1
W1
B1
CSDACA
D0
CSDACB
CS
DIN
CS
DIN
GND
VCC
DAC2V
TP28
D0
CLK
TP29
AGND1
CLK
18.7K
CLK VOB
-15V
R18
10k, 1%
SOCKET U31
DAC, 12 BIT
11
12
14
13
DAC, 12 BIT
D0
11
12
14
13
+15V
U36B
CS
CS
D0
CLK
R19
C11
SDI
CLK
SDO
SOCKET U33
SDI
CLK
SDO
+15V
CLK
U35B
0.15 uF, ceramic
10k, 1%
C12
0.15 uF, ceramic
5
6
+
-
7
4
2
1
5
6
+
-
-15V
4
2
1
W2
B2
AGND2
W2
B2
AGND2
7
3
3
A2
A2
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
15
10
15
10
-15V
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
RS
RS
SHDN
SHDAC
SHDAC
SHDN
-15V
+15V
U36C
16
9
16
9
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
C14
C16
0.15 uF, ceramic
DAC3
10
9
+
-
0.15 uF, ceramic
C17
0.15 uF, ceramic
8
DGND
DGND
DAC3V
+15V
R20
C18
U35C
DAC1
0.15 uF, ceramic
18.7K
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
19
18
20
17
10
9
+
-
19
18
20
17
-15V
A3
A4
W3
B3
AGND3
A3
A4
W3
B3
AGND3
8
DAC1V
DAC1V
TP32
TP33
R21
10k, 1%
R22
+15V
U36D
8
6
5
18.7K
-15V
8
6
5
12
13
+
-
W4
B4
AGND4
W4
B4
AGND4
14
7
7
R23
10k, 1%
+15V
U35D
POT, DIGITAL
POT, DIGITAL
D7
-15V
12
13
+
-
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
14
MBRS340CT
D8
Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
-15V
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
Size
Number
05703
Revision
MBRS340CT
D7 and D8
Must be located
A
Orcad B
within 1" of U32 & U34
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet 3 of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4D\SraowunrcBe\y0:5701a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V
RN14
100Kx8
+15V
-15V+15V
R43
100
ANALOG INPUTS
J109
CH7
CH6
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH1
C55
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RN15
100Kx8
C40
C41
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
0.15 uF, ceramic
0.15 uF, ceramic
+
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
U52
R45 induces an
offset in analog
signal to give a
'live 0' for sensors
with 0 or slightly
negative output
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11
10
9
28
1
3
+
-
OP-AMP, PRECISION
6
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8
OUT
+VSS
-VSS
GND
C42
TC7
0.15 uF, ceramic 2
1M, 1%, 1206 CHIP
R45
10
11
12
27
12
U53
CH6
C43
0.15 uF, ceramic
-15V
VCC
CH7
CH8
MICROFIT-12
C44
U54
CH9
13
2
3
18
14
15
16
17
IN 9
VREF
NC
NC
ENB
A3
A2
A1
A0
C45
+
IN 10
IN 11
IN 12
IN 13
IN 14
IN 15
IN 16
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
C46
.022 uF, 50V
4
18
17
16
15
14
OP OUT
OP-
OP+
5VI
10VI
COMP+
COMP-
AGND
GND
8
7
6
5
0.15 uF, ceramic
5
6
7
8
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
VCC
U55
VCC
R46
1.1K, 5%
DG444DY
J110
3
14
11
6
1
16
9
2
S1
S2
S3
S4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
D1
FOUT
CH14
CH13
CH12
CH11
CH9
4
15
10
7
12
4
5
13
100 R47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D2
D3
D4
VCC
-VS
VCC
TP3
AGND
1
R48 200
AN MUX
+15V
AD652KP
CH8
X2
C54
GND
+VS
8
JITO-2-DCA5AE-4.8MHZ
C47
U56
0.15 uF, ceramic
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic
C48
8
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
NC
7
NC
VIN
+15V
C49
1
4
NC
6
TP48
VCC
1
5
X1
VOUT NR
R47 and R48 reduce the gain
for analog inputs by 1%, so
that we can read slightly above
full scale, to prevent overflow
of ADC reading
PLACE 100
OHM
RESISTOR AS
CLOS AS
POSSIBLE TO
X1 AND X2
5
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic
-15V
0.15 uF, ceramic
R49
100
MB100H-4.8MHZ
TRIM GND
MICROFIT-12
TEMPMUX
TP1
1
VOLTAGE REF
VREF
-15V
VREF
D6
D2
D5
100
R9
RN17
100Kx8
VCC
DACMUX
TC6
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
TP49
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
5
C50
TP57
+
U58
74HC574
1
11
SHDN
OE
CLK
TC8
D4
D3
D7
7
8
9
39
DB4
TIE
38
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
VCC
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
C
RDMBYTE
DB3
TIE
37
VCC
TIE
36
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
GND
DB7
TIE
TIE
DB0
TDI
TMS
TCK
TIE
35
U57
FREQ
C51
0.15 uF, ceramic
34
33
32
31
30
29
U59A
TIE
TIE
1
CHGAIN
IOW
3
D0
VCCIO
GND
TDO
2
SEL60
Xilinx CPLD
C52
0.15 uF, ceramic
SEL60
74HC32
SEL60
D[0..7]
TP50
U60
74HC574
TP51
TP52
TP53
TP54
TP55
U59B
4
5
1
VFPROG
OE
11
6
D1
CLK
IOW
IOR
D0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
SA
SB
SC
START
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
74HC32
VFREAD
MSB
MID
LSB
Title
Size
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
Number
Revision
Orcad B
05703
A
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
4
of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V
+5VANA
U23
IN
ON/OFF NC
1
3
5
4
BYPASS CAPS
MUST BE WITHIN
1/2" OF THE
REGULATOR
INPUT/OUTPUT
PINS
OUT
C60
+
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
LP2981IM5
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
C29
1 uF
D[0..7]
+5VANA
VCC +15V
XT1
U48
MAX382CWN
J27
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
15
4
3
2
17
16
18
1
THERMISTER
TEMPMUX
OUT
+VSS
GND
V-
ENB
A0
A1
A2
RS
WR
5
6
7
8
13
12
11
10
THERMISTER1
IN 1
THERMISTER2
THERMISTER3
THERMISTER4
THERMISTER5
THERMISTER6
THERMISTER7
THERMISTER8
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8
D0
D1
D2
9
THERMISTER6
THERMISTER5
SHDN
10
11
12
13
14
U59D
12
TEMP
IOW
11
MICROFIT-14
RN20
10Kx9, 2%
13
74HC32
+15V-15V
RN18
1Kx4
8
U49
2
15
10
7
12
4
3
1
2
3
4
DAC0V
DACMUX
C36 0.15 uF, ceramic
D1
D2
D3
D4
VCC
-VS
GND
+VS
S1
S2
S3
DAC0V
DAC1V
DAC2V
DAC3V
14
11
6
1
16
9
7
6
5
DAC1V
DAC2V
DAC3V
10K
R34
S4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
VCC
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
DAC0
DAC1
DAC2
DAC3
5
13
8
C37
0.15 uF, ceramic
10Kx4
RN21
DG444DY
Title
Size
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
Number
Revision
05703
A
Orcad B
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
5
of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
CONTROL INPUTS
VCC
RN3
510x8
TP7
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
RN2
15Kx8
U11
U12
PS2702-4
1
19
G1
G2
DIGIO0
IOR
J1004
1
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
L19
L20
L21
2
3
15
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
5
13
12
EXTERNAL
CONTROL
IN
A
FE BEAD
L8
L22
6
7
11
10
74HC541
D[0..7]
8
9
10
L9
TERMBLOCK-10
10000 pF
EXT_+5V_OUT
10000 pF
R27 R28 R29
100 100 100
R31 R32 R33
100 100 100
R26
100
R30
100
330 pF, 50V
330 pF, 50V
330 pF, 50V
U13
PS2702-4
330 pF, 50V
1
16
L23
2
3
15
14
L24
L26
4
5
13
12
L25
FE BEAD
Place these termination resistors at the end of each data
line. Each data line
should be laid out as a daisy-chain, the signal passing
from one IC to the next.
6
7
11
10
8
9
10000 pF
VCC
10000 pF
RN4
15Kx8
U14
RN1
1
19
G1
G2
DIGIO4
IOR
510x4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18 D0
17 D1
16 D2
15 D3
14 D4
13 D5
12 D6
11 D7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
U15
PS2702-4
J1006
1
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EXTERNAL
CONTROL
L28
L29
L30
L27
2
3
15
14
IN
B
D[0..7]
4
5
13
12
74HC541
L11
FE BEAD
10000 pF
L10
6
7
11
10
10
TERMBLOCK-10
8
9
EXT_+5V_OUT
Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
Size
Number
Revision
10000 pF
05703
A
Orcad B
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
6
of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
RN10
510x8
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
C80
U22
PS2702-4
16
C82
10000 pF
1
TP19
C79
C81
SHDN
2
3
15
14
SHDN
U24
74HC574
10000 pF
U6B
4
1
11
4
5
13
12
DIGIO2
OE
CLK
L43
6
IOW
5
L44
L45
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
6
7
11
10
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
74HC32
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
FE BEAD
L46
8
1
9
J1017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A STATUS OUTPUTS
U25
PS2702-4
16
L48
L49
L50
D[0..7]
2
3
15
14
FE BEAD
9
L47
4
5
13
12
10
11
12
6
7
11
10
C84
C86
TERMBLOCK-12
10000 pF
L12
8
9
C83
C85
FE BEAD
C26
C27
10000 pF
RESETTABLE FUSE, 0.3A, 60V
F1
VCC
D6
L13
FE BEAD
EXT_+5V_OUT
VCC
RN12
510x8
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
U26
PS2702-4
16
1
SHDN
2
3
15
14
U27
74HC574
U20D
C90
12
1
11
4
5
13
12
DIGIO3
OE
CLK
L52
L53
L54
10000 pF
11
C88
B STATUS OUTPUTS
IOW 13
IOW
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
6
7
11
10
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
C89 10000 pF
74HC32
C87
J1018
FE BEAD
L51
8
1
9
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
U28
PS2702-4
16
L56
L57
L58
2
3
15
14
FE BEAD
L55
RET
10
GND
4
5
13
12
C28
TERMBLOCK-10
C92
C94
10000 pF
6
7
11
10
C93
C91
L14
10000 pF
8
9
Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
Size
Number
Revision
05703
A
Orcad B
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
7
of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
RN7
510x8
U16
PS2702-4
16
SHDN
1
SHDN
U17
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
10000 pF
74HC574
2
3
15
14
U59C
9
1
11
DIGIO0
OE
CLK
8
10000 pF
IOW 10
4
5
13
12
L32
L33
L34
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
74HC32
6
7
11
10
FE BEAD
L31
8
9
J1008
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
U18
PS2702-4
16
D[0..7]
L36
L37
L38
CONTROL OUTPUTS
1
2
3
15
14
FE BEAD
9
L35
4
5
13
12
10
11
12
13
14
6
7
11
10
CO_EXT_RET
8
9
TERMBLOCK-14
FE BEAD
L59
VCC
EXTERNAL CONNECTOR
SOLDER SIDE
10000 pF
RN5
510x8
10000 pF
10000 pF
U19
PS2702-4
16
1
SHDN
2
3
15
14
U21
74HC574
U20A
1
2
1
11
4
5
13
12
DIGIO4
IOW
OE
CLK
L40
L41
L42
3
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
6
7
11
10
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
74HC32
FE BEAD
L39
8
9
10000 pF
10000 pF
+12V
D2
RELAY SPDT
K1
2
5
4
1
3
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
Q1
J1009
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
R58
+12V
D3
RELAY SPDT
2.2K, 5%
K2
EXTERNAL
REAR PANEL
ALARM OUTPUTS
SO2222
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
Q2
2
5
4
1
3
RELAY SPDT
K3
R6
2
5
4
1
3
+12V
10
11
12
D4
2.2K, 5%
SO2222
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
Q3
TERMBLOCK-12
+12V
D5
RELAY SPDT
K4
2
5
4
1
3
R7
2.2K, 5%
SO2222
DIODE, SCHOTTKY
Q4
R8
Title
Size
2.2K, 5%
SO2222
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702
+12VRET
Number
Revision
05703
A
Orcad B
Date:
File:
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
8
of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\SoDurracwe\n05B7y0:1a.DDB
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
